Download Samsung CLX-3185 multifunctional

CLX-318x Series
Multi-Functional Printer
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.
contents
COPYRIGHT
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
5
5
6
6
6
6
Safety information
Regulatory information
About this user’s guide
Features of your new product
INTRODUCTION
1
1
1
3
4
4
5
6
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
Machine overview (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK)
Front view
Control panel overview (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK)
Machine overview (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW)
Front view
Rear view
Control panel overview (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW)
Understanding the Status LED
Introducing the useful buttons
Menu button
Power button
Print screen button (CLX-3185 only)
Eco Copy button (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN only)
WPS button (CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)
Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge
WIRELESS NETWORK SETUP
(CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK ONLY)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
GETTING STARTED
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
Network environment
Introducing useful network programs
SyncThru™ Web Service
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
SetIP
Using a wired network
Printing a network configuration report
Setting IP address
Network parameter setting
Restoring factory default settings
Installing wired network-connected machine’s driver
Windows
Macintosh
Linux
IPv6 Configuration
Activating IPv6
Setting IPv6 addresses
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Setting up the hardware
Supplied software
System requirements
Microsoft® Windows®
Macintosh
Linux
Installing USB connected machine’s driver
Windows
Macintosh
Linux
Sharing your machine locally
Windows
Macintosh
5
6
7
8
8
8
9
10
10
10
10
NETWORK SETUP
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
ONLY)
_1
Using a wireless network
Choosing your network connection
Printing a network configuration report
IP addresses
Wireless network name and Network Key
Installing a wireless network with the WPS button
Installing a wireless network with cables
Setting a wireless network with WPS button on the control panel
Items to prepare
Choosing your network connection
Changing WPS mode
Setting a wireless network in PBC mode
Setting a wireless network in PIN mode
Setting a wireless network with USB cable
Installing the machine on a wireless network with an Access Point
(Windows)
Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Windows)
Installing the machine on a wireless network with an Access Point
(Macintosh)
Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Macintosh)
Setting a wireless network with network cable
Preparing items
Setting IP address
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Resetting factory default values
Resetting the machine to factory default settings (Windows)
Resetting the machine to factory default settings (Macintosh)
Network parameter setting
10
10
10
11
PRINTING
Completing the Installation
Troubleshooting
Wireless network problems
Solving other problems
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
BASIC SETUP
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
Altitude adjustment
Changing the display language
Setting the date and time (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Changing the clock mode (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Changing the default mode (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Setting sounds
Key sound and alarm sound (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N only)
Speaker, ringer, key sound, and alarm sound
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Speaker volume (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Entering characters using the number keypad
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Entering alphanumeric characters
Keypad letters and numbers
Correcting numbers or names
Inserting a pause
Using the save modes
Using the power saving feature
Setting the default paper
From your machine’s control panel
From your computer
Setting job timeout
Setting the humidity mode
MEDIA AND TRAY
Introducing useful software program
Samsung AnyWeb Print
Samsung Easy Color Manager
Printer driver features
Printer driver
Basic printing
Canceling a print job
Opening printing preferences
Using a favorite setting
Using help
Using special print features
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Printing posters
Printing booklets (Manual)
Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)
Change percentage of your document
Fitting your document to a selected paper size
Using watermarks
Using overlay
Advanced Options
Changing the default print settings
Setting your machine as a default machine
Printing to a file (PRN)
Macintosh printing
Printing a document
Changing printer settings
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Linux printing
Printing from applications
Printing files
Configuring Printer Properties
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
COPYING
1
Loading originals
On the scanner glass
In the document feeder (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Selecting print media
Guidelines for selecting the print media
Media sizes supported in each mode
Changing the tray size for print media
Loading paper in the tray
In the tray
Manual feeding in the tray
Printing on special media
Envelopes
Transparencies
Labels
CardStock/Custom-sized paper
Letterhead/Preprinted paper
Glossy photo
Matte photo
Setting the paper size and type
Setting the paper size
Setting the paper type
Using the output support
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
Basic copying
Changing the settings for each copy
Darkness
Original Type
Reduced or enlarged copy
Changing the default copy settings
ID card copying
Using special copy features
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
Poster copying
Clone copying
Erasing background images
Gray enhance copying
Deciding the form of copy output
SCANNING
1
_2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
8
Basic scanning method
Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)
For USB connected machine
For network connected machine
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)
Scanning by a network connection (Scan to Email)
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Setting up an e-mail account
Scanning to Email
Changing the settings for each scan job
Changing the default scan settings
Setting up Address Book (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Registering speed email numbers
Grouping addresses in Groups Address Book
Using Address Book entries
Searching Address Book for an entry
Printing Address Book
Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager
Set Scan Button tab
Change Port tab
Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
Scanning using the WIA driver
Windows XP
Windows Vista
Windows 7
Macintosh scanning
Scanning with USB
Scanning with network
Linux Scanning
Scanning
Adding Job Type Settings
Using the Image Manager
USING USB MEMORY DEVICE
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW
ONLY)
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
FAXING (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW ONLY)
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
Receiving faxes in memory
Adjusting the document settings
Resolution
Darkness
Forwarding a fax to another destination
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination
Forwarding a received fax to another destination
Forwarding a sent fax to email address
Forwarding a received fax to email address
Setting up Address Book
Speed dial numbers
Group dial numbers
Searching Address Book for an entry
Printing sent fax report automatically
About USB memory
Plugging in a USB memory device
Scanning to a USB memory device
Scanning
Customizing Scan to USB
Printing from a USB memory device
To print a document from a USB memory device
Backing up data
Backing up data
Restoring data
Managing USB memory
Deleting an image file
Formatting a USB memory device
Viewing the USB memory status
MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED FEATURE
Preparing to fax
Using a fax in your computer
Sending a fax (Windows)
Checking a sent fax list (Windows)
Sending a fax (Macintosh)
Sending a fax in your machine
Setting the fax header
Sending a fax
Sending a fax manually
Confirming a transmission
Automatic redialing
Redialing the last number
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
Delaying a fax transmission
Sending a priority fax
Receiving a fax in your machine
Changing the receive modes
Receiving automatically in Fax mode
Receiving manually in Tel mode
Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
Receiving in secure receiving mode
Activating secure receiving mode
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
Fax setup (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Changing the fax setup options
Sending
Receiving
Change Default
Auto Report
Copy setup
Changing the copy setup options
Change Default
Printing a report
Clearing memory
Network (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
only)
Menu overview
MANAGEMENT TOOLS
_3
14
15
15
15
16
17
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
5
5
Introducing useful management tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
To access SyncThru™ Web Service
SyncThru™ Web Service overview
E-mail notification setup
Setting the system administrator information
Using the Smart Panel program
Understanding Smart Panel
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings
SmarThru
Starting SmarThru
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
Printers configuration window
Scanners configuration
Ports configuration
Scanning problems
Fax problems
Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem
Common Windows problems
Common Linux problems
Common Macintosh problems
SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
How to purchase
Available supplies
Available maintenance parts
Checking replaceable’s lifespan
Replacing the toner cartridge
Replacing the imaging unit
Replacing the waste toner container
SPECIFICATIONS
1
MAINTENANCE
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
2
3
Adjusting the color contrast
Finding the serial number
Cleaning the machine
Cleaning the outside
Cleaning the inside
Cleaning the scan unit
Storing the toner cartridge
Handling instructions
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Estimated cartridge life
Maintenance parts
Checking replacables
Tips for moving & storing your machine
CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
1
GLOSSARY
1
TROUBLESHOOTING
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
5
8
8
9
10
11
14
Hardware specifications
Environmental specifications
Electrical specifications
Print media specifications
Redistributing toner
Tips for avoiding paper jams
Clearing original document jams (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
only)
Clearing paper jams
In the tray
In the fuser unit area
In the paper exit area
Understanding display messages
Checking display messages
Solving other problems
Power problems
Paper feeding problems
Printing problems
Printing quality problems
Copying problems
_4
copyright
© 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
•
•
•
•
Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
TrueType, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV. 2.00
Copyright_ 1
safety information
These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to
your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine.
Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and
instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place
for future reference.
Important safety symbols
This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of
danger.
Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide
Warning
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
Caution
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
Do not attempt.
Do not disassemble.
Do not touch.
Unplug the power cord from the wall socket.
Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
Follow directions explicitly.
Operating environment
Warning
Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the
electrical outlet is not grounded.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power
cord.
► Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be
crushed by a heavy object could result in electric
shock or fire.
Do not place anything on top of the machine (water,
small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes,
etc.).
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not
handle the plug with wet hands.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Safety information_ 1
If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke,
makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor,
immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the
machine.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
During an electrical storm or for a period of
non-operation, remove the power plug from the
electrical outlet.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not
attempt to force it in.
► Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this
could result in electric shock.
Be careful, the paper output area is hot.
► Burns could occur.
Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC
interface cords.
► This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your
pet.
If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears
damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections
and request assistance from qualified service personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine does not operate properly after these
instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all
interface connections and request assistance from qualified
service personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in
performance, unplug the machine from all interface
connections and request assistance from qualified service
personnel.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
Operating method
Caution
Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing.
► It can cause damage to the machine.
When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the
paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children
to touch.
► Burns can occur.
Be careful not to put your hand between the machine
and paper tray.
► You may get injured.
When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers
or sharp metal objects.
► It can damage the machine.
Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening.
► This could result in elevated component temperatures which
can cause damage or fire.
Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output
tray.
► It can damage the machine.
Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper.
► New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts.
This machine's power interception device is the power cord.
► To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from
the electrical outlet.
Safety information_ 2
Installation / Moving
Warning
Do not place the machine in an area with dust,
humidity or water leaks.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Caution
When moving the machine, turn the power off and
disconnect all cords; then lift the machine with at
least two people.
► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine
damage.
Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight
location, such as a closet.
► If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire.
Do not place the machine on an unstable surface.
► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage.
Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical
outlet.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
The machine should be connected to
the power level which is specified on the label.
► If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are
using, contact the electrical utility company.
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords.
► This can diminish performance, and could result in electric
shock or fire.
Use only No.26 AWGa or larger, telephone line cord, if
necessary.
► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine.
Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe
operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters
(6 feet) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16
AWG or larger.
► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could
result in electric shock or fire.
a. AWG: American Wire Gauge
Maintenance / Checking
Caution
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the
machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do
not spray water directly into the machine.
► This could result in electric shock or fire.
Keep cleaning supplies away from children.
► Children could get hurt.
When you are working inside the machine replacing
supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the
machine.
► You could get injured.
Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by
yourself.
► It can damage the machine. Call a certified
technician when the machine needs repair.
Safety information_ 3
Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean
from dust or water.
► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire.
To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's
guide provided with the machine.
► Otherwise, you could damage the machine.
Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with
screws.
► The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service
technician.
Supply usage
Caution
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or
ingested.
Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner
cartridge or fuser unit.
► This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable
fire.
When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper,
be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested.
Safety information_ 4
When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep
them away from children.
► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or
ingested.
Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to
the machine.
► In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a
service fee will be charged.
When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash
it.
► Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water.
regulatory information
This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements.
Laser Safety Statement
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.
• Wavelength: 800 nm
• Beam divergence
- Paraller: 12 degrees
- Perpendicular: 30 degrees
• Maximum power or energy output: 5 mW
WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,
can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
Ozone Safety
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, contact your local Samsung dealer.
Regulatory information_ 1
Mercury Safety
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)
Power Saver
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov
Recycling
Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.
China only
Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB
cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or
human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to
promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic
accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal.
Regulatory information_ 2
Correct disposal of batteries in this product
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to
human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of
waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system.
Taiwan only
Radio Frequency Emissions
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
Regulatory information_ 3
UNITED STATES OF AMERICA
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the
presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system
label.
The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the
body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on.
The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by
the FCC.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to
use it. Contact manufacturer for service.
FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use:
While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be
exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at
all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna.
Russia only
Germany only
Turkey only
Regulatory information_ 4
Fax Branding
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or
on the first page of the transmission the following information:
1. the date and time of transmission
2. identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and
3. telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can
be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or require
modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service
Ringer Equivalence Number
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the
machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether
you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving
telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone
line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on
your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label that
contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the
telephone company.
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s
authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company
should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may temporarily cease
service, providing that they:
a)promptly notify the customer.
b)give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c)inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC
Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
You should also know that:
•
•
Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and
reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with
your machine.
• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power
and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency
number.
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
Regulatory information_ 5
Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until
you have another fuse cover.
Contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal
13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
• Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or
green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
Declaration of Conformity (European Countries)
Approvals and Certifications
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable
93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
Hereby, Samsung Electronics declare that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of:
CLX-3185 Series: R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC)
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP)
name to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic
compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd. representative.
Regulatory information_ 6
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and
compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.
European Radio Approval Information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices)
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present.
Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices.
Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark
a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label.
with
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the
European Commission through the R&TTE directive.
European States qualified under wireless approvals:
EU
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K.
EEA/EFTA countries
Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland
European States with restrictions on use:
EU
In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless
EEA/EFTA countries
No limitations at this time
Regulatory information_ 7
Regulatory Compliance Statements
Wireless Guidance
Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be
present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device.
Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The
wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If
the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices
are closely regulated and use may not be allowed.
The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this
time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken
to minimize human contact during normal operation.
As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body
(this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are
on and transmitting.
This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below:
Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless
devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices
are examples of devices that provide wireless communication.
In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless
device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use
of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask
the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device.
Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling
between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of
a wireless device in the destination country.
If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are
in place and the system is fully assembled.
Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it.
Contact manufacturer for service.
Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact
manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
Regulatory information_ 8
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
prior written permission.
5. For written permission, please contact [email protected].
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young ([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to
all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this
distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric Young's,
and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation
(online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected])"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.
Regulatory information_ 9
China only
Regulatory information_ 10
Regulatory information_ 11
about this user’s guide
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each
step during actual usage. It is a valuable resource for both novice and professional users for the proper installation and
use of the machine.
•Read the safety information before using the machine (See "Safety information" on page 1).
•If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (See "Troubleshooting" on page 1).
•Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (See "Glossary" on page 1).
•Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models.
•The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP.
Convention
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below.
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
• Machine refers to printer or MFP.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide.
Convention
Description
Example
Bold
For texts on the display or button names on the machine.
Note
Provides additional information or details for the machine function and feature.
The date format may differ from country to
country.
Caution
Contains information you can use to protect the machine from possible
mechanical damage or malfunction
Do not touch the surface of the drum
located in the toner cartridge or imaging
unit.
Footnote
Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase.
a. pages per minute
(“Cross-reference”)
Refers you to additional detailed information.
(See "Finding more information" on page 2).
About this user’s guide_ 1
Start
Finding more information
You can find information about setting up and using your machine in the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen.
Material name
Description
Quick Installation
Guide
This guide provides information on setting up your machine. This guide is provided in the box with the printer.
User’s Guide
This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, maintaining your machine,
troubleshooting, and replacing supplies.
Machine Driver Help
This help provides you with information about the printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing (See "Using help"
on page 3).
Samsung website
If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, machine drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsung.com/printer.
Downloadable
software
You can download useful software programs from the Samsung website.
• Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily.
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint)
• SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: provides convenient tools for network administrators who need to manage many machines
simultaneously. This program is for network model only. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com)
• Samsung Easy Color Manager: helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like.
(http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager)
About this user’s guide_ 2
features of your new product
Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print.
Special Features
Print with excellent quality and speed
Copy originals in several formats
•
•
•
•
You can print with a full range of colors using cyan, magenta,
yellow and black.
You can print with a resolution of up to 2400 x 600 dpi
effective output.
Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 16 ppm and
Letter-sized paper at up to 17 ppm. In the color mode, your
machine prints A4-sized or Letter-sized paper at up to 4
ppm.
Handle many different types of printable material
•
The 130-sheet tray supports plain paper in various sizes letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized media, postcard
and heavy paper.
Create professional documents
•
•
•
Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your
document are magnified and printed across the sheet of
paper and can then be taped together to form a poster (See
"Printing posters" on page 3).
Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with
words such as “Confidential” (See "Using watermarks" on
page 4).
You can use preprinted or letterhead paper (See"Using
overlay" on page 5).
Save time and money
•
•
•
•
•
Scan the originals and send it right away
•
•
•
•
•
The machine supports IPv6. See "IPv6 Configuration" on
page 6 for the more information.
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
•
You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also
send the fax to several stored destinations.
After the transmission, the machine may point out the fax
reports according to the setting.
Eco copy (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN only)
•
Print in various environments
•
Scan in color and use the precise compressions of BMP,
JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats.
Quickly scan and send files to multiple destination using
networking scanning (See "For network connected machine
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK
only)" on page 2).
IPv6 (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
only)
•
To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single
sheet of paper (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 3).
This machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper
(manual) (See "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)"
on page 3).
Your machine can copy multiple image copies from the
original document on a single page (See "2-up or 4-up
copying (N-up)" on page 2).
There are special functions to erase catalog and newspaper
background.
The print quality and image size may be adjusted and
enhanced at the same time.
You can print with various operating systems such as
Windows, Linux and Macintosh operating systems (See
"System requirements" on page 2).
Your machine is equipped with Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface
and network interface.
Your machine is equipped with wireless network interface
(CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only).
Features of your new product_ 1
You can cut toner consumption and paper usage. See "Eco
Copy button (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN only)" on
page 8 for the more information.
Features by Models
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing and copying to more advanced networking solutions for your business.
Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on models or countries.
The below table is a listing of the major features by each model.
Features
CLX-3180K
CLX-3185
CLX-3185K
CLX-3186
CLX-3185N
CLX-3185NK
CLX-3186N
CLX-3185WK
CLX-3185FN
CLX-3186FN
CLX-3185FW
Print
●
●
●
●
●
Duplex (2-sided) printing (manual)
●
●
●
●
●
Copy
●
●
●
●
●
Eco Copy
●
●
Scan
●
●
●
●
●
Fax
●
●
Network PC fax
●
●
On Hook Dial
●
●
USB 2.0
●
●
●
●
●
●
USB Memory Interface (Direct USB)
●
●
●
●
IPv6
●
●
●
●
Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 Base TX wired LAN
●
●
●
●
Network Interface 802.11b/n/g wireless LAN
●
SyncThru™ Web Service
Print Screen
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
( ●: Included, ○: Optional, Blank: Not available)
•CLX-3180K, CLX-3185, CLX-3185K and CLX-3186 are the same machine despite the name difference. This User’s Guide is written on the basis of
CLX-3185.
•CLX-3185N, CLX-3185NK and CLX-3186N are the same machine despite the name difference. This User’s Guide is written on the basis of CLX-3185N.
•CLX-3185FN and CLX-3186FN are the same machine despite the name difference. This User’s Guide is written on the basis of CLX-3185FN.
Features of your new product_ 2
introduction
1.
This chapter gives you an overview of your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Machine overview (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK)
Control panel overview (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK)
Machine overview (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW)
Control panel overview (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW)
Understanding the Status LED
Introducing the useful buttons
Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge
Machine overview (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK)
Front view
1
8
11
7
6
2
5
4
12
9
10
3
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1
Scanner lid
5
Front door
9
Waste toner container
2
USB porta
6
Output support
10
Imaging unit
3
Tray 1
7
Control panel
11
Scanner glass
4
Front door handle
8
Toner cartridges
12
Scan unit
a. CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK only
Introduction_ 1
Rear view
1
5
2
4
3
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1
Rear door handle
4
USB port
2
Rear door
5
Network porta
3
Power cord receptacle
a. CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK only
Introduction_ 2
Control panel overview (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK)
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1
2
3
16
4
15
5
14
6
7
13
8
5
12
11
10
9
Power
Allows you to turn the power on and off (See "Power button" on page 8).
Eco Copy
Reduces toner consumption and paper usage (See "Eco Copy button (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN only)" on
page 8).
Direct USB (CLX-3185WK)
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on the front
of your machine (See "Using USB memory device (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)" on
page 1).
3
ID Copy
Allows you to coy both sides the ID card like a driver’s license to a single side of paper (See "ID card copying" on page 2).
4
Display
Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.
5
Left/Right Arrow
Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values.
6
OK
Confirms the selection on the screen.
7
Menu
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (See "Menu overview" on page 4).
8
Stop/Clear
Stops an operation at any time. In ready mode, clears/cancels the copy options such as the darkness, the document type
setting, the copy size and the number of copies.
9
Wireless LED (CLX-3185WK)
Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (See "Understanding the Status LED" on page 8).
10
Status LED
Shows the status of your machine (See "Understanding the Status LED" on page 8).
11
Color Start
Begins a printing job in color mode.
12
Black Start
Begins a printing job in black and white mode.
13
Back
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
14
Toner Color
The toner colors shown below LCD display co-works with the display messages (See "Acknowledging the status of the
toner cartridge" on page 9).
15
Scan to
Sends scanned data (See "Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)" on page 1).
Print Screen (CLX-3185)
Prints the displayed screen of your monitor (See "Print screen button (CLX-3185 only)" on page 8).
Direct USB (CLX-3185N)
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on the front
of your machine (See "Using USB memory device (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)" on
page 1).
WPS (CLX-3185WK)
If your wireless access point supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS), you can configure the machine easily without a
computer (See "WPS button (CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)" on page 9).
1
2
16
Introduction_ 3
Machine overview (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW)
Front view
1
14
10
2
9
11
15
3
8
4
7
16
6
12
13
5
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1
Document width guides
5
Tray 1
9
Control panel
13
Imaging unit
2
Document feeder input tray
6
Front door handle
10
Document feeder cover
14
Scanner lid
3
Document feeder output tray
7
Front door
11
Toner cartridges
15
Scanner glass
4
USB port
8
Document output tray
12
Waste toner container
16
Scan unit
Introduction_ 4
Rear view
1
7
6
5
2
4
3
This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1
Rear door handle
5
Network port
2
Rear door
6
Telephone line socket
3
Power cord receptacle
7
Extension telephone socket (EXT)
4
USB port
Introduction_ 5
Control panel overview (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW)
This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model.
1
2
3
4
22
21
5
6
7
20
8
19
9
10
7
11 12 13
18
14
17
16
15
Power
Allows you to turn the power on and off (See "Power button" on page 8).
Eco Copy (CLX-3185FN)
Reduces toner consumption and paper usage (See "Eco Copy button (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN only)" on
page 8).
Direct USB (CLX-3185FW)
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB memory port on the front
of your machine (See "Using USB memory device (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)" on
page 1).
3
ID Copy
Allows you to coy both sides the ID card like a driver’s license to a single side of paper (See "ID card copying" on page 2).
4
Display
Shows the current status and prompts during an operation.
5
Copy
Activates Copy mode.
6
Fax
Activates Fax mode.
7
Left/Right Arrow
Scrolls through the options available in the selected menu and increases or decreases values.
8
Menu
Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus (See "Menu overview" on page 4).
9
OK
Confirms the selection on the screen.
10
Number Keypad
Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters (See "Entering characters using the number keypad
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)" on page 2).
11
Address Book
Allows you to search for stored email addresses.
12
Redial/Pause
Redials the last number in ready mode, or inserts a pause into a fax number in Edit mode.
13
Black Start
Begins a printing job in black and white mode.
14
Stop/Clear
Stops an operations at any time. In ready mode, clears/cancels the copy options such as the darkness, the document type
setting, the copy size and the number of copies.
15
Wireless LED (CLX-3185FW)
Shows the current status of the wireless network connection (See "Understanding the Status LED" on page 8).
16
Status LED
Shows the status of your machine (See "Understanding the Status LED" on page 8).
17
Color Start
Begins a printing job in color mode.
18
On Hook Dial
Engages the telephone line.
19
Back
Sends you back to the upper menu level.
1
2
Introduction_ 6
20
Scan/Email
Activates Scan mode.
21
Toner Color
The toner colors shown below LCD display co-works with the display messages (See "Acknowledging the status of the
toner cartridge" on page 9).
Direct USB (CLX-3185FN)
Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your
machine (See "Using USB memory device (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)" on page 1).
WPS (CLX-3185FW)
If your wireless access point supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS), you can configure the machine easily without a
computer (See "WPS button (CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)" on page 9).
22
Introduction_ 7
Understanding the Status LED
Introducing the useful buttons
•Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your
model. Check your model name.
•Illustrations may differ from your machine depending on the model or
its options. Check your model name.
The color of the Status LED indicates the machine's current status.
Status
Off
Description
•
•
•
Green
Blinking
•
•
The machine is off-line.
The machine is in power saver mode. When
data is received or any button is pressed, it
switches to on-line automatically.
Wireless function can not be used.
When the green LED slowly blinks, the
machine is receiving data from a computer.
When the green LED blinks rapidly, the
machine is printing data.
On
The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blue
On
When the machine is connected to a wireless
network, Wireless LED lights on blue
(CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only).
Red
Blinking
•
•
On
•
•
•
•
•
Menu button
When you want to know the machine status and set your machine to use an
advanced feature, click the Menu button (See "Machine status and
advanced feature" on page 1).
Power button
For CLX-3185 CLX-3185N and CLX-3185WK, plug the power cord into the
AC power outlet and press this button, the machine will be turned on. When
you want to turn the power off, press this button until Power Down appears
on the display. Choose Yes to turn the power off.
For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, plug the power cord into the AC power
outlet and then the machine will be turned on automatically.
A minor error has occurred and the machine is
waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the
display message. When the problem is
cleared, the machine resumes (See
"Understanding display messages" on
page 5).
A small amount of toner is left in the cartridge.
The estimated cartridge life of toner is close.
Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You
may temporarily increase the printing quality
by redistributing the toner (See "Redistributing
toner" on page 1).
A toner cartridge has almost reached the end
of its estimated cartridge life. It is
recommended to replace the toner cartridge
(See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 2).
A paper jam has occurred (See "Clearing
paper jams" on page 2).
The door is opened. Close the door.
There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in
the tray.
The machine has stopped due to a major
error. Check the display message (See
"Understanding display messages" on
page 5).
When the machine goes into power save mode, Power button lights
on blue.
Print screen button (CLX-3185 only)
•
•
•The page will be printed on the default page like A4 or Letter.
•You can only use this function with a USB-connected machine.
•Print Screen can only be used with Windows and Macintosh
operating systems.
•You can only use this function if the machine driver is installed.
Samsung does not recommend using a non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured. Samsung
cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality.
Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung
toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
Check the message on the display. Follow the instructions in the
message or refer to troubleshooting part (See "Understanding display
messages" on page 5). If the problem persists, call a service
representative.
All printing errors will be appeared in the Smart Panel program
window. If the problem persists, call a service representative.
In case of print the active windows displayed in the monitor.
1.Press Print Screen on the control panel.
2.Press OK when Active appears.
The machine prints the active windows displayed in the monitor
In case of print the whole monitor screen.
1.Press Print Screen on the control panel.
2.Press OK when Full appears.
The machine prints the whole monitor screen.
Eco Copy button (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN
only)
The Eco Copy function cuts toner consumption and paper usage. You can
configure Eco Copy function to adjust your paper savings and save setting
you want to use.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK.
Introduction_ 8
3. Press OK when Change Default appears.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Eco Copy appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the mode you want.
•Mono Only: prints all original images in black and white mode.
•2up/Mono: prints two original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of
paper in black and white mode.
•4up/Mono: prints four original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of
paper in black and white mode.
•2up/Color: prints two original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of
paper in color mode.
•4up/Color: prints four original images reduced to fit onto one sheet of
paper in color mode.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
WPS button (CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS) is a standard for easy and secure
establishment of a wireless network. This function simplifies the process of
configuring the wireless network connection and security options.
The WPS button enables you to setup the wireless network configuration
easily. This function simplifies the process of configuring the wireless
network options such as a network name (SSID), data encryption and
authentication. You can complete the wireless connection settings by just
pressing this button.
To perform this function, refer to "Wireless network setup
(CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)" on page 1.
Acknowledging the status of the toner cartridge
The status of toner cartridges is indicated by the Status LED and the LCD
display. If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced, the Status LED
turns red and the display shows the message. However, the arrow mark
shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new
cartridge.
Example:
The above example shows the yellow cartridge status indicated by the
arrow. Check the message to find out what the problem is and how to solve
it. See "Understanding display messages" on page 5 to browse the detailed
information on error messages.
Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot
guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or
repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner
cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty.
Introduction_ 9
getting started
1.
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
Setting up the hardware
Supplied software
System requirements
Installing USB connected machine’s driver
Sharing your machine locally
affected.
•Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your
model. Check your model name.
•Illustrations may differ from your machine depending on the model or
its options. Check your model name.
Setting up the hardware
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the
Quick Installation Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Installation Guide
first and follow the steps below.
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow
extra space to open door(s) and tray(s).
The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the
edge of your desk or table.
2mm
(0.08 in)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2mm
(0.08 in)
Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
Remove all tape.
Install the toner cartridge.
Load paper (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 4).
Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine.
Turn the machine on.
When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.
Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner,
which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality.
This machine will not operate when the power main fails.
Supplied software
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer. You
must install the machine software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS
user, install the software from the supplied CD, or if you are a Linux OS
user, download the software from the Samsung website
(www.samsung.com/printer) and install on your computer.
•Machine software is occasionally updated for reasons like the release
of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the latest
version from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer).
•Installed software may be different depending on each model.
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft.). Refer to the
altitude setting to optimize your printing (See "Altitude adjustment" on
page 1).
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline
greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be
Getting started_ 1
OS
Windows
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Macintosh
•
•
•
•
•
•
Linux
Microsoft® Windows®
Contents
•
•
•
•
Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of
your machine’s features.
Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for scanning
documents on your machine.
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
SmarThrua: This program is the accompanying
Windows-based software for your multifunctional
machine.
Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out
about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program
information and installed scan driver's condition.
Network PC Fax: You can send a fax from your
computer without going to the machine.
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses.
Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of
your machine’s features.
Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for scanning
documents on your machine.
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: You can find out
about Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program
information and installed scan driver's condition.
Fax Utilities: You can send a fax from your computer
without going to the machine.
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses.
Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full
advantage of your machine’s features.
SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.
Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the
machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs
during printing.
SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP
addresses.
a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in various ways using a powerful
image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open
another image editor program such as Adobe Photoshop, from
SmarThru. For details, refer to the on-screen help supplied on the
SmarThru program (See "SmarThru" on page 3).
CPU
free HDD
space
RAM
Windows®
2000
Intel® Pentium® II 400
MHz (Pentium III 933
MHz)
64 MB
(128 MB)
600 MB
Windows® XP
Intel® Pentium® III 933
MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(256 MB)
1.5 GB
Windows
Server® 2003
Intel® Pentium® III 933
MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz)
128 MB
(512 MB)
1.25 GB to
2 GB
Windows
Server® 2008
Intel® Pentium® IV 1
GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz)
512 MB
(2 GB)
10 GB
Windows
Vista®
Intel® Pentium® IV 3
GHz
512 MB
(1 GB)
15 GB
Windows® 7
Intel® Pentium® IV 1
GHz 32-bit or 64-bit
processor or higher
1 GB
(2 GB)
16 GB
•
•
Windows
Server® 2008
R2
Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB
memory (to enable the Aero theme).
DVD-R/W Drive
Intel® Pentium® IV 1
GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz
(x64) processors (2 GHz
or faster)
512 MB
(2 GB)
10 GB
•Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all
Windows operating systems.
•Users who have an administrator right can install the software.
•Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine.
Macintosh
Requirements (recommended)
OPERATING
SYSTEM
Mac OS X
10.3 ~ 10.4
CPU
•
•
Mac OS X
10.5
•
•
System requirements
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following
requirements.
Requirement (recommended)
OPERATING
SYSTEM
Mac OS X
10.6
Getting started_ 2
•
RAM
Intel®
Processors
PowerPC G4/
G5
•
Intel®
Processors
867 MHz or
faster Power
PC G4/ G5
512 MB (1 GB)
1 GB
Intel®
Processors
1 GB (2 GB)
1 GB
•
128 MB for a
PowerPC based
Mac (512 MB)
512 MB for a
Intel-based Mac
(1 GB)
free HDD
space
1 GB
Linux
3. Select Install Now.
Item
Requirements
Operating
system
Fedora 2~10 (32/ 64 bit)
OpenSuSE® 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0,
11.1 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit)
Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit)
Redhat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit)
CPU
Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel CoreTM2)
RAM
512 MB (1 GB)
Free HDD space
1 GB (2GB)
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list of Installation
Language.
The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom Installation
and Install Software Only. The Custom Installation allows you
to select the machine’s connection and choose individual
component to install. The Install Software Only allows you to
install the supplied software such as Smart Panel. Follow the
guide in the window.
•It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for working
with large scanned images.
•The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at maximum.
Installing USB connected machine’s driver
4. Read License Agreement and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
A locally connected machine is a machine directly connected to your
computer by a USB cable.
Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 m (10 ft.).
Windows
You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method.
The following steps are recommended for most users who use a machine
directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine
operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the
installation procedure, click Cancel to close the window.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
will appear.
•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter, which represents
your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.
•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 click
Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents
your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the
User Account Control windows.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008
R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Yes in the User Account Control window.
The program searches for the machine.
Getting started_ 3
If your machine is not connected to the computer, the error
message appears.
•After connecting the machine, click Next.
•If you do not want to connect the machine at this time, click the
check box next to Check if you want to install the software
without connection of the printer. In this case, Print a test
page window will be skipped and installation is completed.
•The installation window in this User’s Guide may differ depending
on the machine and interface in use.
5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you
wish to use and click Next.
If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window
appears.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page
appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 8.
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung website, click On-line
Registration.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to
install.
11. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears, click Continue.
12. Select Typical installation for a local printer and then click OK.
13. The Installation process is being executed.
14. The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the installation
process.
•For CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK, click Cancel to go to the next
step.
•For CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW, select your machine name from the
Printer Name list and click Create. When the confirmation window
appears, click OK.
15. Click Continue on the Read Me window.
16. After the installation is finished, click Restart.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow the steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b)Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c)Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
d)Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
e)Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
f)Enter the password and click OK.
g)The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h)Read the license agreement and click Continue.
i)Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
j)Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
k)When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
l)When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
If your machine is not connected yet to the computer, click How to
connect?. How to connect? gives you the detailed information
about how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in the
window.
9. Click Finish.
If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to
repair or reinstall the driver.
a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and
powered on.
b)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >
Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance.
c)Select Repair or Remove as you wish to execute, then follow the
instruction in the window.
Macintosh
The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the Driver
files that allow you to use the CUPS driver or PostScript driver (only
available when you use a machine, which supports the PostScript driver) for
printing on a Macintosh computer.
Also, it provides you with the TWAIN driver for scanning on a Macintosh
computer.
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website
to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com/printer).
Follow the steps below to install the software.
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
Getting started_ 4
[root@localhost root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/PSU.tar.gz
[root@localhost root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux/psu
[root@localhost psu]#./install.sh
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the
software, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the
steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen.
3.From the Samsung website, download and unpack the Unified Linux
Driver package to your computer.
4.Click
at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen
appears, type in the following.
[root@localhost root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz
[root@localhost root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux
[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow the steps below to uninstall the driver for Linux.
a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b)When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root”
in the Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer
driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
c)Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in the following.
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
d)Click Uninstall.
e)Click Next.
f)Click Finish.
If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the
software, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow
the steps 3 to 4, and then follow the instructions on the terminal
screen.
5.When the welcome screen appears, click Next.
6.When the installation is complete, click Finish.
The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop
icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your
convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on-screen help that
is available through your system menu or from the driver package
Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image
Manager.
Installing the SmartPanel
1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
Sharing your machine locally
Follow the steps below to set up computers to share your machine locally.
If the host computer is directly connected to the machine with a USB cable
and is also connected to the local network environment, client computers
connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the
host computer to print.
3.From the Samsung website, download and unpack the Smart Panel
package to your computer.
1
2
4.Click
at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen
appears, type in the following.
[root@localhost root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/SmartPanel.tar.gz
[root@localhost root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/Linux/smartpanel
[root@localhost smartpanel]#./install.sh
If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the
software, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow
the steps 3 to 4 and then follow the instructions on the terminal
screen.
Installing the Printer Settings Utility
1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the
Login field and enter the system password.
You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system
administrator.
3.From the Samsung website, download and unpack the Printer Settings
Utility package to your computer.
4.Click
at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen
appears, type in the following.
1
2
Host computer
A computer, which is directly connected to
the machine by a USB cable.
Client computers
Computers, which use the machine shared
through the host computer.
Windows
Setting up a host computer
1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 3).
2.Click the Windows Start menu.
3.For Windows Server 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
•For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Getting started_ 5
Devices and Printers.
4.Right-click on the printer icon.
5.For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Properties.
For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the
Printer properties.
If Printer properties item has a ► mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
6.Select the Sharing tab.
7.Check the Share this printer.
In Windows Vista or higher, press Change sharing options
before check the Share this printer.
8.Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK.
Setting up a client computer
1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s
driver" on page 3).
2.Click the Windows Start menu.
3.Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer.
4.Enter in IP address of the host computer and press Enter in your
keyboard.
In case the host computer requires a User name and
Password, fill in User ID and password of the host computer
account.
5.Right-click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect.
6.If a set up complete message appears, click OK.
7.Open the file you want to print and start printing.
Macintosh
The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6. Refer to Mac Help
for other versions.
Setting up a host computer
1.Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 4).
2.Open the Applications folder > System Preferences, and click Print
& Fax.
3.Select your machine to share in the Printers list on the left pane of the
window.
4.Select Share this printer.
Setting up a client computer
1.Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 4).
2.Open the Applications folder > System Preferences, and click Print
& Fax.
3.Press the “+” icon.
A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears.
4.Select your machine and click Add.
Getting started_ 6
network setup
(clx-3185n/clx-3185wk/clx-3185fn/clx-3185f
w only)
1.
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
Network environment
Introducing useful network programs
Using a wired network
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your
model. Check your model name.
(See "Features by Models" on page 2).
Network environment
Network interface
Requirements
•
•
Network operating system •
•
•
Network protocols
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wireless security
•
•
Introducing useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in
network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing
several machines on the network is possible.
Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the
machine's control panel.
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine.
Item
Installing wired network-connected machine’s driver
IPv6 Configuration
Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX
802.11b/n/g Wireless LAN
(CLX-3185WK and CLX-3185FW only)
Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server
2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2
Various Linux OS
Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6
TCP/IPv4
DHCP, BOOTP
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR,
IPP, WSD
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP (S), IPSec
TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR,
SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP (S), IPSec)
(See "IPv6 Configuration" on page 6)
Authentication: Open System, Shared
Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal
(PSK)
Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP,
AES
SyncThru™ Web Service
Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to do
the following tasks.
• You can configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to
connect to various network environments.
• You can customize machine settings.
(See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)" on
page 1).
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
Web-based machine management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot
network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download
this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com.
SetIP
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually
configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on page 2.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 3.
• See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)" on page 3.
TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.
Using a wired network
You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your
network. This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished.
Network setup (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 1
You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding
port on your machine.
10.After entering all parameters, press Stop/Clear to return to ready
mode.
Now go to "Installing wired network-connected machine’s driver" on
page 3.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
Printing a network configuration report
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help
you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Network Info. appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Yes appears and press OK.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address:192.0.0.192
Setting IP address
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and
managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located
on the network.
In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a
static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report.
• Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer. If your machine has a control panel, you can also
change IP address using the machine's control panel.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set IP address for you.
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and
can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
Before using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall by performing
the following steps.
1.Open Control Panel.
2.Double-click Security Center.
3.Click Windows Firewall.
4.Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1.Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine.
When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window.
2.Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive (X represents your
CD-ROM drive).
3.Double-click Application > SetIP.
4.Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5.Select a language, then click Next.
6.Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2.Turn on the machine.
3.From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4.Click on the
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
IPv4 setting using control panel (Windows)
1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2.Turn on the machine.
3.Press Menu on the control panel.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow until TCP/IP appears and press OK.
6.Press the left/right arrow until Static appears and press OK.
7.Press the left/right arrow until IP Address appears and press OK.
8.Enter the IP address using numeric keypad and press OK.
Enter a byte between 0 and 255 using the number keypad and
press the left/right arrow to move between bytes.
Repeat this to complete the address from the 1st byte to the
4th byte.
9.Enter other parameters such as the Subnet Mask and Gateway
appears and press OK.
•MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network
Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For
example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
Network setup (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 2
enter 192.168.1.X (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address).
•Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
•Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6.Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print
the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7.Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8.If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following.
1.Open System Preferences.
2.Click Security.
3.Click the Firewall menu.
4.Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary from your model.
1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2.Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
3.Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows
the printer’s name and IP address information.
4.Highlight the printer information row and select the Setup icon, which
is the second icon from the left in the application menu bar. A TCP/IP
Configuration window will open.
If the printer was not shown in the information row, select the
Manual Setting icon (third from left) to open the TCP/IP
Configuration window.
5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
•MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network
Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For
example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address).
•Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
•Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6.Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver
installation.
1.Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s
MAC address.
2.Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
3.Double-click the SetIPApplet.html file.
4.Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
5.Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, and then click Apply.
When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).
6.The machine prints the network information. Confirm all the settings
are correct.
7.Close the SetIP program.
Network parameter setting
You can also set up the various network settings through the network
administration programs such as SyncThru™ Web Admin Service and
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Restoring factory default settings
You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when
machine that you are using is connected to new network environment.
Restoring factory default settings using control panel
1.Press Menu on the control panel.
2.Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Yes appears and press OK.
5.Turn off and restart machine to apply settings.
Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™
Web Service
1.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and
enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example:
2.Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
3.Click Login on the upper right of the website.
The Login window appears.
4.Type in the ID and Password, and then click Login.
If it is your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in
the below default ID and password.
•ID: admin
•Password: sec00000
5.Click Settings > Network Settings.
6.Click Restore Default on the left pane of the website.
7.Click Clear.
8.Click Yes when the confirmation window appears.
9.Click OK when the success window appears.
10.Turn off and restart machine to apply settings.
Installing wired network-connected machine’s
driver
Windows
You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below.
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for
machine operations will be installed.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network or USB and
powered on.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
Network setup (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 3
•The software CD should automatically run and an installation window
appears.
•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.
•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2 click
Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run
Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in the
User Account Control windows.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server
R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click
Yes in the User Account Control windows.
3. Select Install Now.
If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
•For CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW, you can access Wireless
Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and
Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect
to the machine with a USB cable (See "Setting a wireless
network with USB cable" on page 3).
•The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom
Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom
Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and
choose individual component to install. The Install Software
Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart
Panel. Follow the instruction on the window.
4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
The program searches for the machine.
If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the error
message appears.
•Check if you want to install the software without connection
of the printer.
-Check this option to install this program without a machine
connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be
skipped, and completes the installation.
•Search again
When you press this button, the firewall notice window
appears.
-Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Windows
operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows
Firewall, and inactivate this option.
-Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside the
operating system. Refer to the manual provided by
individual programs.
•Direct Input
The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on
the network.
-Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host
name. Then click Next.
To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network
configuration report (See "Printing a network configuration
report" on page 2).
-Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC
Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared
printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next.
•Help
If your machine is not connected to the computer or network,
this help button gives detailed information about the how to
connect the machine.
•SNMP Community Name
If your system administrator set the new SNMP Community
Name on the machine, you can find the machine in the
network. Contact your system administrator for new SNMP
Community Name.
5. The searched machine will be shown on the screen. Select the one you
wish to use and click OK.
If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window
appears.
6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page
appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 8.
Network setup (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 4
7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
8. To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from
Samsung website, click On-line Registration.
20. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab.
•For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer.
•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP.
21. Select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.
If your machine is not connected yet to the network, click How to
connect?. How to connect? gives detailed information about the
how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in the window.
9. Click Finish.
•After the driver setup is completed, you may enable firewall.
•If your printer driver does not work properly, follow the step below to
repair or reinstall the driver.
a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and
powered on.
b)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs >
Samsung Printers > your printer driver name >
Maintenance.
c)Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the
window.
Macintosh
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered
on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
6. Enter the password and click OK.
7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
8. Read the license agreement and click Continue.
9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for
most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be
installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to
install.
11. The message which warns that all applications will close on your
computer appears. Click Continue.
12. Select Typical installation for a network printer for a network printer
and then click OK.
13. The SetIP program automatically runs. If the machine has already
configured network information, close the SetIP program.
14. Click OK to continue the installation.
15. The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the installation
process.
•For CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK, click Cancel to go to the next step.
•For CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW, select your machine name from the
Printer Name list and click Create. When the confirmation window
appears, click OK.
16. Click Continue on the Read me window.
17. After the installation is finished, click Restart.
18. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility.
•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System
Preferences and click Print & Fax.
19. Click Add on the Printer List.
•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon. A display window will pop
up.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing
performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer
Type option.
22. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.
23. Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine
the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue
first.
24. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name.
•For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model.
•For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, choose
Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using.
Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default
machine.
25. Click Add.
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and
reinstall it.
Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh.
a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
b)Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
c)Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop.
d)Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
e)Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
f)Enter the password and click OK.
g)The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
h)Select Uninstall and click Uninstall.
i)When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
j)When the uninstall is done, click Quit.
Linux
You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website
to install the printer software (http://www.samsung.com/printer).
To install other software:
•See "Installing the SmartPanel" on page 5.
•See "Installing the Printer Settings Utility" on page 5.
Install Linux Driver and add network Printer
1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and
powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set.
2.Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung
website.
3.Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz file and open the new directory.
4.Double-click the Linux folder.
5.Double-click the install.sh icon.
6.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
7.The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
8.Select Network printer and click Search button.
9.The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
Network setup (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 5
10.Select your machine and click Next.
11.Input the printer description and Next
12.When the add printer is done, click Finish
13.When the install is done, click Finish
Add network Printer
1.Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.
2.Click Add Printer…
3.The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.
4.Select Network printer and click the Search button.
5.The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.
6.Select your machine and click Next.
7.Input the printer description and Next
8.When the add printer is done, click Finish.
IPv6 Configuration
TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting
to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default
settings" on page 3).
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6
address.
1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2. Turn on the machine.
3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will check IPv6 addresses.
4.
5.
6.
7.
a)Press Menu on the control panel.
b)Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
c)Press the left/right arrow until Network Info. appears and press
OK.
d)Press the left/right arrow until Yes appears and press OK.
Select Start > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes.
Click Add a printer on the left pane of the Printers and Faxes
windows.
Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows.
The Add Printer Wizard window appears. Follow the instruction on the
window.
If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate
IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.
•
•
•
•
Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts
with FE80).
Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a
network router.
Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.
Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.
DHCPv6 address configuration (Stateful)
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the
following option for default dynamic host configuration.
1.Press Menu on the control panel.
2.Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
3.Press the left/right arrow until TCP/IP (IPv6) appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until DHCPv6 Config appears and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow to access the required value.
•DHCPv6 Addr.: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
•DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
•Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.
6.Press OK.
Manual address configuration
1.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2.When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, move the mouse
cursor on the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network
Settings.
3.Click TCP/IPv6 on the left pane of the website.
4.Select the Manual Address check box. Then, the Address/Prefix text
box is activated.
5.Enter the rest of address (ex:3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the
hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F).
6.Click the Apply button.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6
addressing as a URL.
2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless
Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network
Configuration Report (See "Printing a network configuration report" on
page 2).
3. Enter the IPv6 addresses (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]).
Address must be enclosed in '[ ]' brackets.
Activating IPv6
The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until TCP/IP (IPv6) appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until IPv6 Activate appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK.
6. Turn the machine off and turn it on again.
7. Reinstall your printer driver.
Setting IPv6 addresses
Machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and
managements.
Network setup (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 6
wireless network setup
(clx-3185fw/clx-3185wk only)
1.
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the wireless network connected machine and software.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
Using a wireless network
Setting a wireless network with WPS button on the control panel
Setting a wireless network with USB cable
Setting a wireless network with network cable
For more information about network environment, network programs
and Installing network connected machine’s driver, refer to following
chapters.
•See "Network environment" on page 1.
•See "Introducing useful network programs" on page 1.
•See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 3.
•See "Setting a wireless network with network cable" on page 8.
Using a wireless network
Choosing your network connection
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and
the machine at a time. There are two types of network connections to
consider.
• Wireless network without an access point (Ad-Hoc mode)
• Wireless network with an access point (Infrastructure mode)
Printing a network configuration report
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control
panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help
you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Network Info. appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Yes appears and press OK.
Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine MAC
address and IP address.
For example:
• MAC Address:00:15:99:41:A2:78
• IP Address:192.0.0.192
IP addresses
Every device in a network has a unique numerical address called an IP
Address. Your machine came with a Default IP address of 192.0.0.192,
which you can verify by printing out Network Configuration Report or
Configuration Report.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
•
•
•
Resetting factory default values
Completing the Installation
Troubleshooting
report.
Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer (See "Setting IP address" on page 2).
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set IP address for your machine.
•
Wireless network name and Network Key
Wireless networks require higher security. When an access point is first set
up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used and a Network Key
should be created for the network. Check this information before proceeding
with the machine installation.
Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes
and SOHOs. This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.
• See "Installing the machine on a wireless
network with an Access Point (Windows)" on
page 3.
• See "Installing the machine on a wireless
network with an Access Point (Macintosh)" on
page 6.
Ad-Hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point, the
wireless computer and wireless machine
communicate directly.
• See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc
wireless network (Windows)" on page 5
• See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc
wireless network (Macintosh)" on page 7
After choosing your configuration, follow the simple directions for your
computer operating system, but first locate the Software CD supplied
with the machine before proceeding.
Installing a wireless network with the WPS button
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network
settings by pressing the WPS (
) button on the control panel (See
"Setting a wireless network with WPS button on the control panel" on
page 2).
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 1
Installing a wireless network with cables
You can install a wireless network to connect to the machine with either a
USB cable or a network cable. For most users, we recommend using a USB
cable with the program provided in the supplied software CD.
The following are two ways to install a wireless network with cables.
• With a USB cable: You can simply set up a wireless network using the
program in the supplied software CD. Only Windows and Macintosh
operating system are supported (See "Setting a wireless network with
USB cable" on page 3).
You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings Utility
with a USB cable after installing driver (Windows and Macintosh
operating system are supported).
•
With a network cable: You can set up a wireless network using the
SyncThru™ Web Service program (See "Setting a wireless network with
network cable" on page 8).
Setting a wireless network with WPS button on
the control panel
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network
settings by pressing the WPS (
) button on the control panel.
Items to prepare
You need to ensure you have the following items ready to use:
• Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™(WPS).
• Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS).
Choosing your network connection
There are two methods to connect your machine to a wireless network by
using the WPS (
) button on the control panel.
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your
machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS button on the
control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi
Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router)
respectively.
The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your
machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router).
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a
typical wireless network environment.
Access point (or wireless router) that supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™) has the symbol shown below.
Changing WPS mode
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode. To change WPS mode,
follow the steps below.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Wireless appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until WPS Setting appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the WPS mode you want appears and
press OK.
) button on the control panel
•PBC mode: Pressing both the WPS (
of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router)
respectively, you can easily connect your machine to a wireless
network.
•PIN mode: Entering the supplied PIN number on a Wi-Fi Protected
Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router), you can
manually connect your machine to a wireless network.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Setting a wireless network in PBC mode
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode.
Connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode
To connect your machine to the wireless network in PBC mode, follow
the steps below. You also need to check the WPS (
) button on the
control panel and the messages on the display.
You can check the status of the wireless network connection (See
"Understanding the Status LED" on page 8).
1.Press the WPS (
) button for more than two seconds on the
control panel.
2.Push WPS on AP within 02:00: The machine starts waiting for up to
two minutes until you press the WPS (PBC) button on the access
point (or wireless router).
3.
: Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless
router) within two minutes.
4.Connecting: The machine is connecting to the access point (or
wireless router).
5.Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the blue wireless LED light stays on.
•AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection
process, AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
If the machine fails to connect to the wireless network, the
Connecting Failed and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting
messages appear in turn on the display. Then, the machine tries to
re-connect to the wireless network.
Re-connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode
If you press the WPS (
) button on the control panel when the
wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to
the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless
connection settings and address.
1.Connecting: If you press the WPS (
) button on the control panel
when the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to
re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously
used wireless connection settings and address.
2.Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the blue wireless LED light stays on.
•AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection
process, AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
If there is no previously used access point (or wireless router),
or the network settings have been changed, the Connecting
Failed and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages
appear in turn on the display, and then the machine tries to
re-connect to the wireless network. After the second attempt to
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 2
connect, the machine stops the wireless connection function if
the machine fails to get the wireless connection. Try again to
connect to the wireless network after solving the connection
problem.
Canceling a wireless network connection process in
PBC mode
To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is
connecting to the access point (or wireless router) in PBC mode, press
the WPS (
) button on the control panel again. The Connecting
Canceled and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages
appear in order on the display.
Disconnecting a wireless network connection in PBC
mode
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the WPS (
)
button on the control panel again.
•When the access point (Wi-Fi Network) is in idle mode: The
Disconnected message appears on the display. The machine is
returned to ready mode.
•When the access point (Wi-Fi Network) is being used: The Wait
Job to Finish message appears on the display. The machine waits
until the current job is finished. Then, the wireless network
connection is automatically disconnected. The machine is returned
to ready mode.
Setting a wireless network in PIN mode
Factory default in your machine is PBC mode. To change to PIN mode,
refer to "Changing WPS mode" on page 2.
Connecting a wireless network in PIN mode
To connect to the wireless network in PIN mode, follow the steps below.
You also need to check the status of the WPS (
) button and the
wireless LED.
1.Press the WPS (
) button for more than four seconds on the
control panel.
2.Enter xxxx-xxxx on AP:02:00: Eight-digit PIN number appears on
the display. Then, the machine starts waiting for up to two minutes
until you enter the supplied PIN number on the access point (or
wireless router).
3.
: Enter the supplied PIN number on the access point (or wireless
router) within two minutes.
4.Connecting: The machine is connecting to the wireless network.
5.Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the blue wireless LED light stays on.
•AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection
process, AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
If the machine fails to connect to the wireless network, the
Connecting Failed and the Wait 2 minutes for
Reconnecting messages appear in turn on the display. Then,
the machine tries to re-connect to the wireless network.
Re-connecting to a wireless network in PIN mode
If you press the WPS (
) button on the control panel when the
wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to
the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless
connection settings and address.
1.Connecting: If you press the WPS (
) button on the control panel
when the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to
re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously
used wireless connection settings and address.
2.Connected: When the machine is successfully connected to the
wireless network, the blue wireless LED light stays on.
•AP SSID: After completing the wireless network connection
process, AP’s SSID information appears on the display.
If there is no previously used access point (or wireless router),
or the network settings have been changed, the Connecting
Failed and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages
appear in turn on the display, and then the machine tries to
re-connect to the wireless network. After the second attempt to
connect, the machine stops the wireless connection function if
the machine fails to get the wireless connection. Try again to
connect to the wireless network after solving the connection
problem.
Canceling a wireless network connection process in
PIN mode
To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is
connecting to the access point (or wireless router) in PIN mode, press
the WPS (
) button on the control panel again. The Connecting
Canceled and the Wait 2 minutes for Reconnecting messages
appear in order on the display.
Disconnecting a wireless network connection in PIN
mode
To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the WPS (
)
button on the control panel again.
•When the access point (Wi-Fi Network) is in idle mode: The
Disconnected message appears on the display. The machine is
returned to ready mode.
•When the access point (Wi-Fi Network) is being used: The Wait
Job to Finish message appears on the display. The machine waits
until the current job is finished. Then, the wireless network
connection is automatically disconnected. The machine is returned
to ready mode.
Setting a wireless network with USB cable
Refer to your network administrator or the person that set up your
wireless network for information about your network configuration.
Installing the machine on a wireless network with an
Access Point (Windows)
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
• Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• USB cable
Creating the infrastructure network in Windows
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 3
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2.Turn on your computer, access point and machine.
3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
•The software CD should automatically run and an installation
window appears.
•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.
•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2
click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account
Control windows.
4.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.
5.Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
6.The software searches the wireless network.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
7.After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices.
Select the name (SSID) of access point you are using, and click
Next.
If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or
if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click
Advanced Setting.
•Enter the wireless Network Name: Type the SSID of
access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
•Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
•Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared
Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre
Shared Key passphrase), which is manually configured on
the access point and each of its clients.
•Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128,
TKIP, AES, TKIP AES)
•Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
•Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key
value.
•WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select
the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the
access point has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. The window
may differ according to its security mode, WEP or WPA.
•In case of WEP
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication
and enter WEP security key. Click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
•In case of WPA
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key
that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.
8.The window shows the wireless network setting, and check if settings
are right. Click Next.
•For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is
shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click Change
TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP.
•For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is
shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change
TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the
machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration
information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the
network administrator to get the static IP address.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
-IP address: 169.254.133.42
-Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
-IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address, with
changed last three digits.)
-Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
-Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP
address of your machine to 1.)
9.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
10.The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears.
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup
procedure.
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.
Then, click Next.
11.Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.
12.Select the components to be installed. Click Next.
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine
name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine
as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine.
Click Next.
13.After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test
page.
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 16.
14.If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
15.To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information
from Samsung, click On-line Registration.
16.Click Finish.
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 4
Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless
network (Windows)
If you do not have an Access Point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by
following the simple steps below.
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
•Network-connected computer
• Software CD provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• USB cable
Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Windows
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2.Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine.
3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
•The software CD should automatically run and an installation
window appear.
•If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive. Click OK.
•If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows 2008 Server R2
click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.
Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents
your CD-ROM drive and click OK.
•If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or
Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account
Control windows.
4.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option.
5.Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the
License Agreement. Then, click Next.
6.The software searches the wireless network.
If the software has failed to search the network, check if the
USB cable is connected properly between the computer and
machine, and follow the instruction on the window.
7.After searching the wireless network, a list of wireless network your
machine has searched appears.
If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last
wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is portthru
and Signal is Printer Self Network.
Then, click Next.
If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select other wireless
network from the list.
If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or
if you want to set the ad-hoc configuration manually, click
Advanced Setting.
•Enter the wireless Network Name: Type in the SSID name
you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
•Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc.
•Channel: Select the channel.
•Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
•Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128)
•Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
•Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key
value.
•WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select
the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the
ad-hoc network has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open
System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
•WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
8.The window shows the wireless network setting, and check if settings
are right. Click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know
the computer’s network configuration information. If the
computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless
network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the
computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless
network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static
wireless network setting, you must contact the network
administrator to get the static IP address.
•For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP
to change the assignment method to Receive IP address
automatically (DHCP).
•For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP
to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
-IP address: 169.254.133.42
-Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
-IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use the computer’s IP
address, with changed last three digits.)
-Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
-Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from
IP address of your machine to 1.)
9.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow
the steps on the window.
Click Next if you are finished the computer’s wireless network
settings.
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 5
If you set the computer’s wireless network as DHCP, it will take
several minutes to receive the IP address.
10.The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears.
Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup
procedure.
Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen.
Then, click Next.
11.Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.
12.Select the components to be installed. Click Next.
After selecting the components, you can also change the machine
name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine
as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine.
Click Next.
13.After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test
page.
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 16.
14.If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.
If not, click No to reprint it.
15.To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information
from Samsung, click On-line Registration.
16.Click Finish.
Installing the machine on a wireless network with an
Access Point (Macintosh)
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
•Network-connected computer
•Software CD that provided with your machine
•The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• USB cable
Creating the infrastructure network in Macintosh
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2.Turn on your computer, access point and machine.
3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
4.Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
5.Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
6.Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
7.Enter the password and click OK.
8.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
9.Read the license agreement and click Continue.
10.Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
11.Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended
for most users. All components necessary for machine operations
will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components
to install.
12.When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
13.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option and then click
OK.
14.The software searches the wireless network.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
15.After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices.
Select the name (SSID) of access point you are using and click
Next.
If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or
if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click
Advanced Setting.
•Enter the wireless Network Name: Type the SSID of
access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
•Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.
•Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to
authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared
Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre
Shared Key passphrase) which is manually configured on
the access point and each of its clients.
•Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128,
TKIP, AES, TKIP AES)
•Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
•Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key
value.
•WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select
the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window does appear when the
access point has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. The window
may differ according to its security mode, WEP or WPA.
•In case of WEP
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication
and enter WEP security key. Click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
•In case of WPA
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key
that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also
uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.
16.The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings
are right. Click Next.
•For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is
shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click Change
TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP.
•For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is
shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change
TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 6
values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the
machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration
information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the
network administrator to get the static IP address.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
-IP address: 169.254.133.42
-Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
-IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address, with
changed last three digits.)
-Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
-Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from IP
address of your machine to 1.)
17.The wireless network is connecting according to the network
configuration.
18.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
19.The Installation process is being executed.
20.The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the installation
process.
•For CLX-3185WK, click Cancel to go to the next step.
•For CLX-3185FW, select your machine name from the Printer
Name list and click Create. When the confirmation window
appears, click OK.
21.Click Continue on the Read Me window.
22.After the installation is finished, click Restart.
Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless
network (Macintosh)
If you do not have a Access Point (AP), you may still connect the machine
wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by
following these simple directions.
Items to prepare
Ensure you have next items ready.
•Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• The machine installed with a wireless network interface
• USB cable
Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Macintosh
When the items are ready, follow below steps:
1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.
2.Turn on your computer and machine.
3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
4.Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
5.Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.
6.Double-click the Installer OS X icon.
7.Enter the password and click OK.
8.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue.
9.Read the license agreement and click Continue.
10.Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.
11.Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended
for most users. All components necessary for machine operations
will be installed.
If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual operations
will be installed.
12.When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click Continue.
13.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option and then click
OK.
14.The software searches the wireless network.
If the searching has failed, you may check if the USB cable is
connected between the computer and machine properly, and
follow the instruction on the window.
15.After searching the wireless network, a list of wireless network your
machine has searched appears.
If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last
wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is portthru
and Link Quality is Printer Self Network.
Then, click Next.
If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select other wireless
network from the list.
If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or
if you want to set the ad-hoc configuration manually, click
Advanced Setting.
•Enter the wireless Network Name: Type in the SSID name
you want (SSID is case-sensitive).
•Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc.
•Channel: Select the channel.
•Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption
may or may not be used, depending on the need for data
security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a
proper WEP key can access the network.
•Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128)
•Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.
•Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key
value.
•WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select
the appropriate WEP Key Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the
ad-hoc network has security setting.
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open
System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
•WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol
preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network.
WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged
on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key.
16.The window which shows the wireless network setting appears.
Check the settings and click Next.
Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know
the computer’s network configuration information. If the
computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless
network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the
computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless
network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static
wireless network setting, you must contact the network
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 7
administrator to get the static IP address.
•For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP
to change the assignment method to Receive IP address
automatically (DHCP).
•For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm
window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP
to enter the IP address and other network configuration
values for the machine.
Example)
If computer’s network information is as below:
-IP address: 169.254.133.42
-Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Machine’s network information should be as below:
-IP address: 169.254.133. 43 (Use computer’s IP address,
with changed last three digits.)
-Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet
mask.)
-Gateway: 169.254.133.1 (Change the last three digits from
IP address of your machine to 1.)
17.The wireless network is connecting according to the network
configuration.
18.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB
cable between the computer and machine. Click Next.
19.The Installation process is being executed.
20.The Fax Queue Creator window appears during the installation
process.
•For CLX-3185WK, click Cancel to go to the next step.
•For CLX-3185FW, select your machine name from the Printer
Name list and click Create. When the confirmation window
appears, click OK.
21.Click Continue on the Read Me window.
22.After the installation is finished, click Restart.
Setting a wireless network with network cable
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to
work with your network, you will need to perform some configuration
procedures.
Refer to your network administrator, or the person that set up your
wireless network for information about your network configuration.
Setting IP address
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and
managements. In most cases, a new IP address will be automatically
assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located
on the network.
In a few situations, the IP address must be set manually. This is called a
static IP and is often required in a corporate Intranets for security reasons.
• DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a
few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the
machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained
above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the
assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the
report. (See "Printing a network configuration report" on page 2.)
• Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address
from your computer.
In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network
administrator to set this address for you.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your
machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A
MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and
can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
1.Open Start > All programs > Control Panel.
2.Double-click Security Center.
3.Click Windows Firewall.
4.Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1.Insert the software CD provided with your machine. When the driver
CD runs automatically, close that window.
2.Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your
CD-ROM drive.)
3.Double-click Application > SetIP.
4.Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5.Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
6.Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.
Starting the program
1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2.Turned on the machine.
3.From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
4.Click on the
TCP/IP configuration window.
Preparing items
Ensure you have next items ready.
• Access point
• Network-connected computer
• Software CD that provided with your machine
• Wireless network printer (your machine)
• Network cable
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 8
5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address.)
•Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
•Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6.Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
Configuring the machine’s wireless network
•MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network
Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For
example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer.
For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150,
enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than
the computer’s address.)
•Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask.
•Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway.
6.Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print
the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7.Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8.If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing
by performing the following:
The path and UIs may differ by Macintosh OS version. Refer to the
Macintosh OS manual.
1.Open System Preferences.
2.Click Security.
3.Click the Firewall menu.
4.Turn firewall off.
The following instructions may vary for your model.
1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.
2.Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html.
3.Double-click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows
the printer’s name and IP address information.
4.Click on the
icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this
information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
•MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network
Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For
Before starting, you will need to know the network name(SSID) of your
wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was
set when the wireless router(access point) was installed. If you do not know
about your wireless environment, please ask the person who has set up
your network.
To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service.
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
Before starting the wireless parameter configuration, make sure cable
connection status.
1.Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not,
connect the machine with a standard network cable.
2.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and
enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example:
3.Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4.Click Login on the upper left of the website.
A Login page appears.
5.Type in the ID and Password then click Login.
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the
below default ID and password.
•ID: admin
•Password: sec00000
6.When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings >
Network Settings.
7.Click Wireless > Wizard.
Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration.
However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select
Custom.
8.Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list.
•SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a
wireless network. Access points and wireless devices attempting
to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same
SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.
•Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless
connections (See "Wireless network name and Network Key" on
page 1).
-Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with
each other in a peer-to-peer environment.
-Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with
each other through an access point.
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 9
If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the
SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc,
select the machine’s SSID. Note that “portthru” is the default
SSID of your machine.
9.Click Next.
If wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered
password (network key) and click Next.
10.The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup.
If the setup is right, click Apply.
Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your
machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the
network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN
and wired LAN simultaneously.
Resetting factory default values
Should it become necessary to reset the Samsung printer to its factory
default settings, please use the following steps. Connect the machine to
your network, or you may connect the machine directly to a computer using
the special network cable.
If you cannot connect the machine to a computer from its former
network, it must be temporarily assigned to a new Ad-Hoc network to
access the SyncThru™ web page. After you have established a direct
link to the machine, use the special network cable and follow these
instructions to reset the machine to the factory defaults.
Resetting the machine to factory default settings
(Windows)
1. Connect the special network cable between the machine and the PC.
2. Open a browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of
your machine. The machine’s SyncThru™ Web Service page will
open.
3. Select Settings > Network Settings in the top menu bar.
4. Select Restore Default in the left side bar, and select the Clear button
next to Factory Default (or Network). Click OK in each of the following
three windows that pop up.
5. Disconnect the printer from the network, recycle the power, and print a
Network Configuration Report to confirm the reset. This will reset all the
parameters and the printer will no longer be on the network.
Resetting the machine to factory default settings
(Macintosh)
1. Connect the special network cable between the printer and the
Macintosh.
2. Open System Preferences and select Print & Fax settings. Select the
printer you want to reset, opening the Print Queue, and select the
Utility icon in the top menu bar. Safari will open the printer’s
SyncThru™ Web Service page.
3. Click Settings > Network Settings in the top menu bar.
4. Click Restore Default in the left side bar, and click the Clear button next
to Factory Default (or Network). Click OK in each of the following three
windows that pop up.
5. Disconnect the printer from the network, recycle the power, and print a
Network Configuration Report to confirm the reset. This will reset all the
parameters and the printer will no longer be on the network.
Network parameter setting
You can also set up the various network settings through the network
administration programs such as SyncThru™ Web Admin Service and
SyncThru™ Web Service.
Completing the Installation
After you have installed your Samsung wireless network printer, print
another copy of the Network Configuration Report and keep it for future
reference. You are now ready to use your new Samsung wireless printer on
your network.
Troubleshooting
Solving problems that might occur during wireless setting and
installing the machine driver
Wireless network problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the
followings.
Printer Not Found
•Your computer or machine may not turn on. Turn on your computer or
machine.
•USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine.
Connect machine to your computer using a USB cable.
•The machine does not support wireless network. Check the User’s
Guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and
prepare a wireless network machine.
Connecting Failure - Not Found SSID
•The machine is unable to search network name (SSID), which is you
selected or entered name. Check the network name (SSID) on your
access point and re-try to connect.
•Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.
Connecting Failure - Invalid Security
•You configured security incorrectly. Check the configured security on
your access point and machine.
Connection Failure - General Connection Error
•Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the
USB cable and your machine power.
Connection Failure - Connected Wired Network
•Your machine is connected with wired network cable. Remove the
wired network cable from your machine.
PC Connecting Error
•The configured network address is unable to connect between your
computer and machine.
-For DHCP network environment
The machine receives the IP address automatically (DHCP)
when the computer is configured DHCP.
-For Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when the computer is
configured with the static address.
If your computer is configured with the following addresses:
-IP address: 192.168.1.100
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 10
-Subnet address: 255.255.255.0
-Gateway address: 192.168.1.1
Type in the following addresses for your machine:
-IP address: 192.168.1.101
-Subnet address: 255.255.255.0
-Gateway address: 192.168.1.1
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including baby
monitors, motors, cordless phones, security system cameras, other
wireless networks, and some Bluetooth devices.
Solving other problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the
followings.
For information on access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Your computer, access point or machine may not be turned on. Check if
they are powered on.
Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the reception is far
from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty
receiving the signal.
Cycle the power for access point (or wireless router), machine and
computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network
communication.
Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the
communication.
If the computer and the machine is connected on a same network it
cannot be searched, firewall software might be blocking the
communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off
and try searching the machine again.
Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can
check the IP address by printing the network configuration report.
Check whether access point (or wireless router) has a configured
security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or
wireless router) administrator.
Check whether the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver
and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due
to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if
the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been
reset.
Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the
network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a
user's information before connecting to access point (or wireless router).
This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication (Bluetooth) is not supported.
When using the Ad-hoc mode, for operating systems such as Windows
Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time
you use the wireless machine.
You cannot use infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc mode at the same time
for Samsung wireless network machine.
The machine is within the range of the wireless network.
For most networks, the machine should be within 30 meters (100 feet) of
the wireless access point (or wireless router).
The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the
wireless signal.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless
router) and the machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router)
are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal
or concrete.
The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may
interfere with the wireless signal.
Wireless network setup (CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)_ 11
basic setup
1.
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like
to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Altitude adjustment
Changing the display language
Setting the date and time (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Changing the clock mode (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Changing the default mode (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Setting sounds
Altitude adjustment
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality
of print.
Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are.
4,000 m
(13,123 ft)
3,000 m
(9,842 ft)
1,000 m
(3,280 ft)
4
0
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Language appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow to display the language you want.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
When you set the time and date, they are used in delay fax and delay print.
They are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need to
change it for the correct time being.
2
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Setting the date and time
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
1
2,000 m
(6,561 ft)
•
•
•
•
Entering characters using the number keypad
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Using the save modes
Setting the default paper
Setting job timeout
Setting the humidity mode
If the machine’s power is cut off, you need to reset the correct time
and date once the power has been restored.
1
2
3
4
High 3
High 2
High 1
Normal
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer
Software CD.
2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X.
3. Click Printer Setting.
If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the
altitude via SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Setting > Altitude Adjustment. Select the appropriate value from
the drop-down list, and then click Apply.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Date & Time appears and press OK.
Enter the correct time and date using left/right arrow or numeric keypad.
Month = 01 to 12
Day = 01 to 31
Year = requires four digits
Hour = 01 to 12
Minute = 00 to 59
You can also select AM or PM by using the number keypad.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Changing the clock mode
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
You can also set the altitude in System Setup > Machine Setup >
Altitude Adj. option on the machine’s display.
Changing the display language
To change the language that appears on the display, follow the steps below.
You can set your machine to print out the time on your fax using either a
12-hour or 24-hour format.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
Basic setup_ 1
3. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Clock Mode appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the 12-hour or 24-hour clock format
and press OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Changing the default mode
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Your machine is preset to Copy mode. You can switch this default mode
between Fax mode and Copy mode.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Default Mode appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the mode you want.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
The setting options may differ according to your model. Check your
model name.
You can control the following options.
• Key sound: Turns the key sound On or Off. With this option set to On, a
tone sounds each time a key is pressed.
• Alarm Sound: Turns the alarm sound On or Off. With this option set to
On, an alarm tone sounds when an error occurs or fax communication
ends.
• Speaker: Turns On or Off the sounds from the telephone line through
the speaker, such as a dial tone or a fax tone. With this option set to
Comm. which means “Common”, the speaker is on until the remote
machine answers.
You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial. If your
machine has a handset, you can adjust the volume level using the
handset.
Ringer: Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can select
Off, Low, Mid, and High.
Key sound and alarm sound (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N
only)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Speaker volume (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
To adjust the volume using On Hook Dial
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2. Press On Hook Dial. A dial tone sounds from the speaker.
3. Press the left/right arrow until you hear the volume you want.
4. Press On Hook Dial to save the change and return to ready mode.
Entering characters using the number keypad
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Setting sounds
•
4. Press the left/right arrow until the sound option you want appear and
press OK.
•Key Sound: you can select On or Off.
•Alarm Sound: you can select On or Off.
•Speaker: you can select Comm., On or Off.
•Ringer: you can select High, Mid, Low or Off.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status or volume for the sound
you have selected appears and press OK.
6. If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 5 to set other sounds.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Sound/Volume appears and press OK.
Select Key Sound or Alarm Sound.
Select On or Off and press OK.
If necessary, repeat steps 4 through 5 to set other sounds.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
As you perform various tasks, you may need to enter names and numbers.
For example, when you set up your machine, you enter your name or your
company’s name, and the fax number.
Entering alphanumeric characters
1. When you are prompted to enter a letter, locate the button labeled with
the character you want. Press the button until the correct letter appears
on the display.
For example, to enter the letter O, press 6, labeled with MNO.
Each time you press 6, the display shows a different letter, M, N, O, m,
n, o and finally 6.
You can enter special characters such as space, plus sign, and etc. For
details, see the below section.
2. To enter additional letters, repeat step 1.
If the next letter is printed on the same button, move the cursor by
pressing the left/right arrow button and then press the button labeled
with the letter you want. The cursor will move to the right and the next
letter will appear on the display.
You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice.
3. When you have finished entering letters, press OK.
Keypad letters and numbers
Speaker, ringer, key sound, and alarm sound
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Sound/Volume appears and press OK.
Basic setup_ 2
Key
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters
1
@/.‘1
2
ABCabc2
3
DEFdef3
4
GHIghi4
5
JKLjkl5
6
MNOmno6
7
PQRSpqrs7
Key
Setting the paper type
Assigned numbers, letters, or characters
8
TUVtuv8
9
WXYZwxyz9
0
&+-,0
*
*
#
#
1.Press Menu on the control panel.
2.Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow to select the paper type you want.
6.Press OK to save the selection.
7.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
From your computer
Correcting numbers or names
If you make a mistake while entering a number or name, press the left/right
arrow button to delete the last digit or character. Then enter the correct
number or character.
Inserting a pause
With some telephone systems, you must dial an access code (9, for
example) and listen for a second dial tone. In such cases, you must insert a
pause in the telephone number. You can insert a pause while you are
setting up speed dial numbers.
To insert a pause, press Redial/Pause at the appropriate place while
entering the telephone number. A - appears on the display at the
corresponding location.
Using the save modes
Using the power saving feature
When you will not be using the machine for a while, you can use this feature
to save power.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Power Save appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow to select the time you want.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Setting the default paper
The setting options may differ according to your model. Check your
model name.
You can select the paper you would like to keep using for printing job.
From your machine’s control panel
Setting the paper size
1.Press Menu on the control panel.
2.Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Paper Size appears and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow to select the paper size you want.
6.Press OK to save the selection.
7.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Basic setup_ 3
Windows
1.Click the Windows Start menu.
2.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes.
•For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3.Right-click on your machine.
4.For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, select the Printing
Preferences from context menu.
If Printing Preferences item has a ► mark, you can select
other printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
5.Click Paper tab.
6.Select options such as paper size and type.
7.Press OK.
If you want to use special-sized paper such as a billing paper,
select Paper tab > Size > Edit... in the Printing Preferences (See
"Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
Macintosh
Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time
they want to print using other settings.
1.Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2.Open the File menu and click Print.
3.Go to Paper Feed pane.
4.Set appropriate tray from which you want to print.
5.Go to Paper pane.
6.Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from
which you want to print.
7.Click Print to print.
Linux
1.Open Terminal Program.
2.When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following.
[root@localhost root]# lpr <FileName>
3.Select Printer and click Properties…
4.Click on the Advanced tab.
5.Select the tray (source) and its options, such as paper size and type.
6.Press OK.
Setting job timeout
You can set the time the machine waits before it restores the default copy
settings if you do not start copying after changing them on the control panel.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Timeout appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the time setting you want appears.
Selecting Off means that the machine dose not restore the default
settings until you press Black Start or Color Start to begin copying or
Stop/Clear to cancel.
6. Press OK to save the selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Setting the humidity mode
Print quality is affected by humidity levels. Paper may be damp if your
location is a humid area: set the humidity mode.
1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer
Software CD.
2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or
Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status
bar in Mac OS X.
3. Click Printer Setting.
If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the
humidity mode via SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Setting > Humidity. Select the appropriate value from the
drop-down list, and then click Apply.
You can also set the humidity mode in System Setup > Machine
Setup > Humidity option on the machine’s display.
Basic setup_ 4
media and tray
1.
This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Loading originals
Selecting print media
Changing the tray size for print media
Loading paper in the tray
Printing on special media
Setting the paper size and type
Using the output support
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass. Align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models. Check your model name.
Loading originals
You can use the scanner glass to load an original for copying or scanning.
On the scanner glass
Using the scanner glass, you can copy or scan originals. You can get the
best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images.
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.
3. Close the scanner lid.
•Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy
quality and toner consumption.
•Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.
Always keep it clean (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 3).
•If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the
scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then
close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,
start copying with the scanner lid open.
•Be careful not to break the scanner glass. You may get hurt.
•Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid. The scanner lid
may fall on your hands and get hurt.
•Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or
scanning. It is harmful to eyes.
In the document feeder (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
only)
Using the document feeder, you can load up to 15 sheets of paper (75 g/m2,
20 lb bond) for one job.
1. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading originals.
Media and tray_ 1
2. Load the original face up into the document feeder. Make sure that the
bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the
document input tray.
•
Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project.
Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce
sharper and more vibrant images.
Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how
crisp the printing looks on the paper.
•
•
•Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of the
sheets characteristics, improper handling, unacceptable
temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which
cannot be controlled.
•Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
•Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.
The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to
media type used (See "Print media specifications" on page 3).
•Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It
could cause damage to the machine.
•Using inflammable print media can cause a fire.
•Use designated print media (See "Print media specifications" on
page 3).
3. Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size.
The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer
may lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a
fire.
Media sizes supported in each mode
Mode
Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the
printout. Always keep the glass clean (See "Cleaning the scan
unit" on page 3).
Selecting print media
You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper, envelopes,
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meets the
guidelines for use with your machine and from the appropriate tray.
Guidelines for selecting the print media
Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this User’s Guide
may cause the following problems.
• Poor print quality
• Increased paper jams
• Premature wear on the machine
• Permanent fuser damage, not covered under warranty.
Properties such as weight, composition, grain and moisture content are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following factors.
• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are
described in print media specifications (See "Print media specifications"
on page 3).
Size
Source
Copy mode
Letter, A4, Legal,
Oficio, US Folio,
Executive, JIS B5, A5,
A6
Tray 1
Print mode
All sizes supported by
the machine.
Tray 1
Manual feeding in the
tray
Fax mode
All sizes supported by
the machine.
Tray 1
Changing the tray size for print media
To load longer sizes of paper such as Legal-sized paper, you need to adjust
the paper guides to extend the paper tray.
To change the tray size to other size, you must adjust the paper length
guide properly.
4
3
Media and tray_ 2
1
2
1
2
3
4
Paper extend lever
Paper cover
Paper length guide
Paper width guide
1. Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove
paper from the tray if necessary.
guide.
If the paper that you need to print is shorter than 222 mm (8.74 inches),
press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray. Unextend the tray by
pushing manually the extended portion back into the tray. Adjust the
paper length guide and paper width guide.
2. Pressing and unlatching the guide lock in the top of the tray, pull the tray
out manually.
1
1
2
•Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to
warp.
•Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl.
•If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper
jams.
3. Place paper with the side you want to print facing up.
4. Slide the paper length guide until it lightly touches the end of the paper
stack. Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the
paper stack without causing it to bend.
5. Close the paper cover.
Slide the tray back into the machine.
After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray (See "Setting
the paper size and type" on page 6).
For paper smaller than Letter-sized, return the paper guides to their
original positions and adjust the paper length guide and paper width
Media and tray_ 3
•Due to insufficient paper in the tray, the paper length guide can be
pushed to inside, load paper enough.
•If you experience problems with paper feed, load a paper into the
tray one by one.
•You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be
facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience
problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that
print quality is not guaranteed.
The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To
change the size to A4 or Letter, you must adjust the lever and paper width
guide properly.
1. Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove
paper from the tray if necessary.
2. If you want to change the size to Letter, turn over the tray, and hold the
lever at the back and rotate it clockwise.
3. Place paper with the side you want to print facing up.
4
A
R
T
L
4. Insert the tray back into the machine.
5. When you print a document, set the paper type and size in the tray.
For information about setting the paper type and size (See "Setting the
paper size and type" on page 6).
Manual feeding in the tray
To load different sizes of paper such as envelope, transparency, labels or
custom-sized paper, you need to adjust the paper guides for manual
feeding in the tray. To use manual feeding in the tray, you must adjust the
paper length/width guide properly.
Tips on using the manual feeding method
•If you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application,
you need to press the Color Start or Black Start button each time
you print a page. Load only one type, size and weight of print media
at a time in the tray.
•To prevent paper jams, do not add media while printing. This also
applies to other types of print media.
•Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the
tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
•Always load the use recommended print media only to avoid paper
jams and print quality problems (See "Print media specifications" on
page 3).
•Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before loading
them into the tray.
A
4
3. Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the lever.
R
T
L
Printing on special media
If you want to change the size to A4, first move the paper width
guide to left and rotate the lever counterclockwise. If you force the
lever, it could damage the tray.
Loading paper in the tray
In the tray
1. Pull out the paper tray. And adjust the tray size to the media size you are
loading (See "Changing the tray size for print media" on page 2).
2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before
loading the paper.
The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type
option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This
setting appears in the list so that you can select it. This will let you get the
best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved.
• Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printing on 70 to 90
g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs).
• Thick: 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs) thick paper.
• Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs) thin paper.
• Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs) cotton paper.
• Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs) color-backgrounded paper.
• Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs) preprinted/letterhead paper.
• Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs) envelope.
• Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs) recycled paper.
When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled and/or
jamming may occur due to excessive curl.
•
•
•
•
Transparency: 0.104 to 0.124 mm (0.004094 to 0.004882 inches)
thickness of transparency paper.
Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs) labels.
CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lbs) cardstock.
Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs) bond.
Media and tray_ 4
•
•
•
Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs). If you need to keep the print-out
for a long time, such as for archives, select this option.
Glossy Photo: 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs) glossy photo paper. See
"Print media specifications" on page 3.
Matte Photo: 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs) matte photo paper. See
"Print media specifications" on page 3.
overhead projector.
Envelopes
Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the
envelopes.
To print an envelope, the stamp area is on the left side and the end of the
envelope with the stamp area enters the printer first.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors.
-Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2
otherwise, jams may occur.
-Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than
6 mm (0.24 inches) curl, and should not contain air.
-Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged.
-Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and
pressure of the machine during operation.
Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds.
Do not use stamped envelopes.
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining,
self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.
Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to
the corner of the envelope.
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand
machine’s fusing temperature.
Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine.
Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of
time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing.
To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle transparencies
carefully.
To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged
sunlight.
Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn
edges.
Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet.
To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the
printed sheets stack up as they are printed out.
Recommended media: Xerox 3R91331 (A4), Xerox 3R2780 (Letter).
Base type transparency (ex. Xerox 3R91331) results in better image
and paper handling quality than paper backed (ex. Xerox 3R3028) or
removable stripe (3R3108) ones.
•Transparency with static electricity can cause image quality
problems.
•Depending on the selection or storage conditions of the transparency,
jam or image scratch might occur.
Labels
To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for laser printers.
2
1 Acceptable
2 Unacceptable
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that
folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s
fusing temperature about 170°C(338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps
and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing or jams, and may even
damage the fuser.
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.59
inches) from the edges of the envelope.
Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet.
•
Transparencies
To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for laser
printers.
•
In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would
be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the
•
When selecting labels, consider the following factors.
-Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s
fusing temperature (about 170°C(338 °F)).
-Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between
them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the
labels, causing serious jams.
-Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm
(0.51 inches) of curl in any direction.
-Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels.
Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can
cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to
machine components.
Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The
Media and tray_ 5
•
Setting the paper size and type
adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the
machine.
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are
wrinkled, bubbled or otherwise damaged.
After loading paper in the paper tray, set the paper size and type using the
control panel. These settings will apply to copy and scan modes. For
computer printing, select the paper size and type in the application program
you use on your computer (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
CardStock/Custom-sized paper
Postcards, cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with your
machine.
The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on
the control panel.
Setting the paper size
•
•
Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3 inches) wide or 152.4 mm
(6 inches) long.
In software applications, set the margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches)
away from the edges of the material.
Letterhead/Preprinted paper
A
A
A
A
•
•
If you want to use special-sized paper-such as a billing paper, select
Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening
printing preferences" on page 2).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A
•
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Paper Size appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow to select the paper size you want.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Setting the paper type
Letterhead/Preprinted materials can be printed with your machine.
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that
will not melt, vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected
to the machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your
machine’s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170°C (338
°F).
Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not
adversely affect machine rollers.
Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to
prevent changes during storage.
Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the
paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted
paper, reducing print quality.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Paper Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Paper Type appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow to select the paper type you want.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Using the output support
Glossy photo
Load one paper to the tray at a time, facing glossy side up.
•
Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could
cause damage to the machine.
Matte photo
Load one paper in the tray at a time, side to be printed facing up.
Media and tray_ 6
The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the
surface, and do not allow children near it.
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models. Check your model name.
The printed pages stack on the output support and it will help the printed
pages to align.
Media and tray_ 7
printing
1.
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printer driver features
Basic printing
Opening printing preferences
Using help
Using special print features
Changing the default print settings
Setting your machine as a default machine
Printing to a file (PRN)
Macintosh printing
Linux printing
Printer driver
The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP.
Feature
Introducing useful software program
Samsung AnyWeb Print
This tool helps you to screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of
Windows Internet Explorer more easily, than when you use the ordinary
program. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link the website where
the tool is available for the download. This tool is available only for Windows
operating systems.
Samsung Easy Color Manager
This program helps users to adjust color as they like. Users can adjust the
printout color as they see them on the monitor. The adjusted color can be
stored on the printer driver and applied to printouts. Click Start > All
programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Color Manager >
Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available
for the download. This tool is available only for Windows and Macintosh
operating systems.
Printer driver features
Your printer drivers support the following standard features.
• Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection
• Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer
drivers.
Windows
Machine quality option
●
Booklet printing
●
Poster printing
●
Multiple pages per sheet
●
Fit to page printing
●
Reduce and enlarge printing
●
Watermark
●
Overlay
●
Double-sided printing (manual)
●
(●: supported, Blank: not supported)
Basic printing
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh or Linux
applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending
on the application you use.
•Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this User’s Guide
may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the
composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check
the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine.
Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications (See
"System requirements" on page 2).
•When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a
warning mark
or
. An exclamation mark (
) means you
Some models or operating systems may not support some of the
feature(s) in the following table.
can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( )
mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s
settings or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing
from various Windows applications.
Macintosh basic printing (See "Macintosh printing" on page 6).
Linux basic printing (See "Linux printing" on page 7).
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP.
Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your
operating system or the application you are using.
Printing_ 1
Opening printing preferences
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list.
You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing
Preferences.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.
3. Select your machine from the Select Printer.
4. Click Properties or Preferences.
You can select the basic print settings including the number of copies
and the print range from within the Print window.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer
driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print
window to change the print setting (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 2).
4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.
If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung AnyWeb
Print will save your time for screen-captured images or printing the
image. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung
AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link the website
where the tool is available for the download.
Canceling a print job
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as
follows.
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows Server 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3. For Windows Server 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista or Server 2008,
double-click your machine.
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, right-click your printer icon
> context menus > See what’s printing.
If See what’s printing item has a ► mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
4. From the Document menu, select Cancel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the
machine icon (
) in the Windows task bar.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop/Clear on the
control panel.
Using a favorite setting
The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for the
Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use.
To save a Presets item, follow the steps below.
1. Change the settings as needed on each tab.
2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.
3. Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved.
If you click Add, the Add button changes to the Update button. Select more
options and click Update, settings will be added to the Presets you made.
To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop-down list. The
machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected.
To delete saved settings, select it from the Presets drop-down list and click
Delete.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default
Preset from the Presets drop-down list.
Printing_ 2
Using help
Click the question mark on the upper-right corner of the window and click on
the topic you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with
information about that option's feature, which is provided from the driver.
If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Samsung tab in
the Printing Preferences window and enter a keyword in the input line of
the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update,
registration and so on, click appropriate buttons.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.
3. Select the page layout you want.
Available layouts:
•Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages.
•Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages.
•Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages.
4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters
or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to
make it easier to paste the sheets together.
Using special print features
Special print features include the followings.
• "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 3.
• "Printing posters" on page 3.
• "Printing booklets (Manual)" on page 3.
• "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)" on page 3.
• "Change percentage of your document" on page 4.
• "Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 4.
• "Using watermarks" on page 4.
• "Using overlay" on page 5.
• "Advanced Options" on page 5.
5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type.
6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together.
Printing booklets (Manual)
This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the
pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a
booklet.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
8
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To
print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and
arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one
sheet.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages per Side in the Type
drop-down list.
3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16)
in the Pages per Side drop-down list.
4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary.
5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the
sheet.
6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type.
7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Printing posters
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 9 sheets of
paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one
poster-size document.
9
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down
list.
3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type.
The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In
order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the
available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be
automatically canceled. Select only available paper (paper without
or
mark).
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.
Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)
You can print on both sides of a paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how
you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter,
Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper (See "Print media specifications"
on page 3).
We recommend not to print on both sides of special media such as
labels, envelopes or thick paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage
the machine.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
2. Click the Advance tab.
Printing_ 3
3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to page.
4. Select the Size, Source and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding
option you want.
•None
•Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in
bookbinding.
Using watermarks
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document.
For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading
“DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all
pages of a document.
•Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They
can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.
Using an existing watermark
4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the
printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the
document first. After that, a message appears on your computer.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job.
Change percentage of your document
1.To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 2).
2.Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the
Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in
the preview image.
3.Click OK or Print until you exit the print window.
Creating a watermark
You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the
printed page by typing in a percentage you want.
1.To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 2).
2.From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3.Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter
up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on
the first page only.
4.Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size and shade from the Font
Attributes section as well as set the angle of the watermark from the
Message Angle section.
5.Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list.
6.When you have finished, click OK or Print until you exit the Print
window.
To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark
drop-down list.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
2. Click the Paper tab.
3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.
4. Select the Size, Source and Type in Paper Options.
5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Fitting your document to a selected paper size
This feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size
regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to
check fine details on a small document.
Editing a watermark
1.To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 2).
2.Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3.Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks
list and change the watermark message and options.
4.Click Update to save the changes.
5.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
A
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
2. Click the Paper tab.
Printing_ 4
Deleting a watermark
5.If the overlay file you want does not appear in theText drop-down list,
select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you
want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external
source, you can also load the file when you access the Open
window.
After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay
List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the
Overlay List box.
6.If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this
box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a
document for printing, asking you to confirm you wish to print an
overlay over your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the
overlay automatically prints with your document.
7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
The selected overlay prints over your document.
1.To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 2).
2.Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down
list. The Edit Watermarks window appears.
3.Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current
Watermarks list and click Delete.
4.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Using overlay
An overlay is content you store on your hard disk drive that can be
superimposed over any document you print. An overlay is often used to take
the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you
can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is
currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s
letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the
machine, instead you can just print the letterhead overlay on your
document.
The resolution of the overlay document must match the resolution
of the original print job.
Deleting an overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
1.In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab.
2.Select Edit in the Overlay drop-down list.
3.Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.
4.Click Delete.
5.When the confirmation message window appears, click Yes.
6.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Creating a new page overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay file
containing your content.
1.Create or open a document containing the content you want to use in
a new page overlay. Position the items exactly where you want them
to appear when they are added to the original.
2.To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences
(See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
3.Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list.
The Edit Overlay window appears.
4.In the Edit Overlay window, click Create.
5.In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the
File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary (The default
is C:\Formover).
6.Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List.
7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
8.The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk
drive.
The overlay document size must match same as the document
you print. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
Using a page overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your
document. To print an overlay with a document, do the following.
1.Create or open the document you want to print.
2.To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on
page 2).
3.Click the Advanced tab.
4.Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list.
Advanced Options
Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your
specific printing needs.
If the option is grayed out or not shown, that option is not applicable
with the printer language you are using.
1. To change the print settings from your software application, access
Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 2).
2. Click the Graphics tab.
•The options you can select may vary depending on your machine.
•Refer to the help for each option’s information provided from the
Printing Preferences.
•Font/Text: Select Darken Text to print text darker than on a normal
document. Use All Text Black to prints solid black, regardless of the
color it appears on the screen.
•Graphic Controller: Fine Edge allows you to emphasize edges of
texts and fine lines for improving readability. Grayscale
Enhancement allows users to preserve the details of nature photos,
and improve contrast and readability among gray-scaled colors
when printing color documents in grayscale.
•Toner Save: Adjusting this option extends the life of your toner
cartridges and reduces your cost per page without a significant
reduction in print quality.
-You can move the slider from No Saving to Maximum Saving to
reduce toner consumption.
3. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window.
Printing_ 5
Changing the default print settings
1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows Server 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3. Right-click your machine.
4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing
Preferences.
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select
the Printing preferences.
If Printing preferences item has a ► mark, you can select other
printer drivers connected with the selected printer.
2. Click Print.
3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For
example c:\Temp\file name.
If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in
My Documents. The saved folder may differ depending on your
operating system.
5. Change the settings on each tab.
6. Click OK.
If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in
Printing Preferences.
Setting your machine as a default machine
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows Server 2000, select Settings > Printers.
•For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes.
•For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware
and Sound > Printers.
•For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers.
•For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3. Select your machine.
4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer.
Macintosh printing
This section explains how to print a document in a Macintosh operating
system.
Printing a document
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver
setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a
Macintosh.
1. Open the document you want to print.
2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup.
3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling or other options, and make
sure that your machine is selected.
For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default
printer item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers
connected with the selected printer.
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. You can print the
document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer. The document is
saved with the printer formatting, such as font selection and color
specifications, in a .prn file that can be printed on another printer.
To save a print job as a file:
4. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you
want to print.
5. Click Print.
Changing printer settings
You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine.
Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine
name, which appears in the printer properties pane may differ depending on
the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer
properties pane is similar to the following.
Printing_ 6
•The setting options may differ depending on models or Macintosh OS
versions.
•The following pane may differ depending on your operating system or
the application you are using.
The following pane is the first pane you will see when you open the printer
properties pane. Select other advanced features from the drop-down list.
settings in the RGB Color option.
•Screen: This option allows you to select options to convert
continuous-tone image into printable binary image.
•Color Adjust: You can adjust the image by changing the settings in
the Color Adjust option.
Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature
provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Layout from the drop-down list. In the Pages per Sheet
drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one
sheet of paper.
Layout
The Layout dialog provides options to adjust how the document
appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet
of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list to access the following
features.
•Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be
printed on one page (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of
paper" on page 7).
•Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing
direction on a page similar to the examples on the screen.
•Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on
the sheet.
•Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180
degrees.
Graphics
The Graphics dialog provides options for selecting Quality and Color
mode. Select Graphics from the drop-down list to access the graphic
features.
•Quality: This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The
higher setting option you choose, the better sharpness and clarity of
printed characters or images are. A higher setting will also increase
the time it takes to print a document.
•Color mode: You can set the color options. Setting to Color typically
produces the best possible print quality for color documents. If you
want to print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale.
3. Select the other options you want to use.
4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected number of pages you
want to print on one sheet of paper.
Linux printing
Printing from applications
There are several Linux applications that allow you to print using the
Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print using any of these
applications.
1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.
2. Select Print directly using LPR.
3. From the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from
the printer list and click Properties.
Paper
Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from
which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If
you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper
type.
Printer Features
The Printer Features dialog provides Advanced Options and Color
Adjust options. Select Printer Features from the drop-down list to
access the following features.
•Fine Edge: It allows users to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines
for improving readability and align color channel registration in color
printing mode.
•RGB Color: You can adjust the appearance of images by changing the
Printing_ 7
4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at
the top of the window.
•General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper
type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex
feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of
pages per sheet.
•Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the
text options, such as spacing or columns.
•Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used
when printing image files, such as color options, image size, or
image position.
•Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper,
source and special print features.
If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not
supported by your machine.
5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your
print job.
To abort the current job, click Cancel.
•General: This option allows you to change the printer location and
name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in
Printers configuration.
•Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If
you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa
while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab.
•Driver: This option allows you to view or select another machine
driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options.
•Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to
cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check
box to see previous jobs on the job list.
•Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click
Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click
Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected
class.
4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties
window.
Printing files
You can print many different types of files on your machine using the
standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS
LPR utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the
standard LPR tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.
To print any document file
1. Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command line and press
Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click
Open.
2. From the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and
change the print job properties.
3. Click OK to start printing.
Configuring Printer Properties
Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers
configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine.
1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2. Select your machine from the available printers list and click Properties.
3. The Printer Properties window opens.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window.
Printing_ 8
copying
1.
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for copying documents.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic copying
Changing the settings for each copy
Changing the default copy settings
Darkness
•The supported setting options may differ according to your model.
Check your model name.
•It could be printed different color with fluorescent color due to the
property of scanner.
If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images, you can
adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
Basic copying
The following is the normal copy procedure for a machine without an
Automatic Document Feeder(ADF) such as CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N.
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. For details about
loading an original, see "Loading originals" on page 1.
2. Enter the number of copies using the left/right arrow if necessary.
3. If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge,
Darkness, Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons
(See "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 1).
4. Press Color Start to begin color copying.
Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying.
The following is the normal copy procedure for a machine with an ADF such
as CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW.
1. Press
ID card copying
Using special copy features
Deciding the form of copy output
(Copy) on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
(Copy) and Menu in
order on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the contrast mode you want appears and
press OK.
•Lightest: Works well with lightest print.
•Light: Works well with light print.
•Normal: Works well with standard typed or printed originals.
•Dark: Works well with dark print.
•Darkest: Works well with darkest print.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Original Type
The original type setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the
document type for the current copy job.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "On the scanner glass" on page 1 or "In the document feeder
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)" on page 1).
3. If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce/Enlarge,
Darkness, Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons
(See "Changing the settings for each copy" on page 1).
4. Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad, if
necessary.
5. Press Color Start to begin color copying.
Or press Black Start to begin black and white copying.
2.
3.
4.
If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation, press
Stop/Clear and the copying will stop.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
(Copy) and Menu in
order on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Original Type appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the image mode you want appears and
press OK.
•Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
•Photo: Use when the originals are photographs.
•Magazine: Use when the originals are the form of magazine.
•Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Changing the settings for each copy
5.
Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly
and easily make a copy. However, if you want to change the options for
each copy, use the copy function buttons on the control panel.
Reduced or enlarged copy
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25% to 400%
when you copy original documents from the scanner glass.
If you press Stop/Clear while setting the copy options, all of the
options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and
returned to their default status. Or, they will automatically return to
their default status after the machine completes the copy in progress.
To select from the predefined copy sizes
1.Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
Copying_ 1
(Copy) and Menu in
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item such as business card.
order on the control panel.
2.Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Reduce/Enlarge appears and press
OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until the size setting you want appears and
press OK.
5.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
1.Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
(Copy) and Menu in
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
order on the control panel.
2.Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Reduce/Enlarge appears and press
OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Custom appears and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow to enter the copy size you want. Pressing and
holding the button allows you to quickly scroll to the number you
want. For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, you can also use the
number keypad.
6.Press OK to save the selection.
7.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the
bottom of your copy.
1. Press ID Copy on the control panel.
2. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
3. Place Front Side and Press [Start] appears on the display.
4. Press Color Start or Black Start.
Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back
Side and Press [Start].
5. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
Changing the default copy settings
The copy options including darkness, original type, copy size and number of
copies can be set to those most frequently used. When you copy a
document, the default settings are used unless they have been changed by
using the corresponding buttons on the control panel.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
(Copy) and Menu in
order on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the setup option you want appears and
press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press
OK.
Repeat steps 4 through 5 as needed.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
While you are setting copy options, pressing Stop/Clear cancels the
changed settings and restores the defaults.
6. Press Color Start to begin color copying.
Or, press Black Start to begin black and white copying.
•If you do not press the Color Start or Black Start button, only the
front side will be copied.
•If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may not
be printed.
•If you press Stop/Clear or if no buttons are pressed for approximately
30 seconds, the machine cancels the copy job and returns to
ready mode.
Using special copy features
You can use the following copy features.
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
Your machine can print 2 or 4 original images reduced to fit onto one sheet
of paper.
2
3
4
2
ID card copying
1
1
Your machine can print 2-sided originals on one sheet.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
order on the control panel.
Copying_ 2
(Copy) and Menu in
3. Press the left/right arrow until Layout appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Clone Copy appears and press OK to
save the selection.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Layout appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until 2-Up or 4-Up appears and press OK to
save the selection.
5. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce/Enlarge menu while
making a clone copy.
You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce/Enlarge menu for
making a 2- or 4-up copy.
Erasing background images
Poster copying
Your machine can print an image onto 9 sheets of paper (3x3). You can
paste the printed pages together to make one poster-sized document.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
You can set the machine to print an image without its background. This
copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when
copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper
or a catalog.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(Copy) and Menu in
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
order on the control panel.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Layout appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Poster Copy appears, and press OK to
save the selection.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
5.
6.
Gray enhance copying
When you copy the original in black and white, use this feature for the better
quality of copy-out-put. This feature is only for the copy in black and white.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and
printed one by one in the following order.
Clone copying
Your machine can print multiple images copies from the original document a
single page. The number of images is automatically determined by the
original image and paper size.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, press Menu on the control panel.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
(Copy) and Menu in
order on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
(Copy) and Menu in
order on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Adjust Bkgd. appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the background option you want appears.
•Off: Does not use this feature.
•Auto: Optimizes the background.
•Enhance Lev. 1 - 2: The higher the number is, the more vivid the
background is.
•Erase Lev. 1 - 4: The higher the number is, the lighter the background
is.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
(Copy) and Menu in
order on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Copy Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Gray Enhance appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow to select On or Off.
Press OK to save the selection.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Deciding the form of copy output
You can set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2
copies of a 3 page original, one complete 3 page document will print
followed by a second complete document.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185 and CLX-3185N, place a single original document facing
down on the scanner glass and press Menu on the control panel.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, place original documents facing
up in the document feeder, or you can use the scanner glass with a
single document facing down and close the scanner lid. Press
(Copy) and Menu in order on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK.
Copying_ 3
4. Press the left/right arrow until Copy Collation appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK to save the
selection.
•On: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.
•Off: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
7. Enter the number of copies using the left/right arrow or numeric keypad.
8. Press Start to begin copying.
One complete document will print followed by the second complete
document.
Copying_ 4
scanning
1.
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Basic scanning method
Scanning originals and sending to your computer (Scan to PC)
Scanning by a network connection (Scan to Email)
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Changing the settings for each scan job
Changing the default scan settings
•The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including a computer speed, available disk space,
memory, the size of the image being scanned and color bit depth
settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are
scanning, you may not be able to scan at a certain resolution,
especially using enhanced resolution.
•It could be scanned different color with fluorescent color due to the
property of scanner.
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your
model. Check your model name.
(See "Features by Models" on page 2).
Basic scanning method
You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the
network.
• Samsung Scan and Fax Manager: Scan the originals from the control
panel. Then, the scanned data will be stored in the connected
computers My Documents folder. When you install all the software in
the supplied CD, the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is also
automatically installed on your computer. This feature can be used via
the local connection or the network connection (See "Using Samsung
Scan and Fax Manager" on page 4).
• TWAIN: TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications. Scanning
an image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. This feature can be used via the local connection or
the network connection (See "Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software"
on page 6).
• SmarThru: This program is the accompanying software for your
machine. You can use this program to scan images or documents. This
feature can be used via the local connection or the network connection
(See "SmarThru" on page 3).
• WIA: WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature,
your computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB
cable (See "Scanning using the WIA driver" on page 6).
Setting up Address Book (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager
Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
Scanning using the WIA driver
Macintosh scanning
Linux Scanning
For USB connected machine
This is a basic scanning method for USB-connected machine.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the ADF.
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on page 1.
3. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185, CLX-3185N and CLX-3185WK, press Scan to on the
control panel.
(Scan) on the control
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
panel.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to PC appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Local PC appears and press OK.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the application program you want appears
and press OK.
Default setting is My Documents.
To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or
delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax
Manager > Properties > Set Scan Button.
7. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press
OK.
•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
•Scan Color: Sets the color mode.
•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
•Scan Size: Sets the image size.
•Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan
destination to My Documents.
•If you want to scan from the default setting, press Start.
8. Scanning begins.
Scanning originals and sending to your
computer (Scan to PC)
•Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents > My
Pictures > Samsung folder.
•You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan and
Fax Manager program.
You can scan an image on the machine via the Samsung Scan and Fax
Manager program that is installed in your USB- or network-connected
computer.
•You can also scan by pressing Window’s Start > Control Panel >
Samsung Scan and Fax Manager > Quick Scan.
Scanning_ 1
For network connected machine
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK
only)
Make sure the printer driver is installed on your computer using the software
CD, since the printer driver includes the scan program (See "Installing wired
network-connected machine’s driver" on page 3).
1. Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a
network and Samsung Scan and Fax Manager is installed on the
computer.
2. Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the ADF.
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on page 1.
3. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185N and CLX-3185WK, press Scan to on the control panel.
(Scan) on the control
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
panel.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to PC appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Network PC appears and press OK.
If you see Not Available message, check the port connection.
6. Select your registered computer ID, and enter the Password if
necessary.
•ID is the same ID as the registered Computer ID for Samsung
Scan and Fax Manager.
•Password is the 4 digit number registered Password for
Samsung Scan and Fax Manager.
7. Press the left/right arrow until the application program you want appears
and press OK.
Default setting is My Documents.
To add or delete the folder where the scanned file is saved, add or
delete the application program in Samsung Scan and Fax
Manager > Properties > Set Scan Button.
8. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press
OK.
•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
•Scan Color: Sets the color mode.
•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
•Scan Size: Sets the image size.
Scanning by a network connection (Scan to
Email) (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up network
parameters correctly, you can scan and send images over the network.
Setting up an e-mail account
To scan and send an image as an email attachment. You need to set up
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go
to access the SyncThru™ Web Service website.
2. Click Login on the upper right of the website.
The Login window appears.
3. Type in the ID and Password, and then click Login.
If it is your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the
below default ID and password.
•ID: admin
•Password: sec00000
4. Move the mouse cursor on the Settings of the top menu bar and then
click Network Settings.
5. Click Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) on the left pane of the website.
6. Enter the SMTP server domain name or the IP address(dotted decimal
notation) you want to use on the SMTP Server text box.
Only alphabet letters, number(0~9), period(,) and hyphen(-) are
permitted in these text boxes.
7. Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 on Port Number text box.
The default port number is 25.
8. Select SMTP Requires Authentication check box in the SMTP Login
Information section.
9. Enter the login ID on the Login ID text box and the password on the
Password text box.
10. Enter the password one more time on the Confirm Password to confirm
your choice.
11. Click Apply.
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP,
select the SMTP requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication
check box.
a)Enter the POP3 server domain name on the POP3 Server input
field and the port number from 1 to 65535 on the Port Number text
boxes respectively.
The default port number is 110.
b)Enter the login ID on the Login ID text box and the password on the
Password text box.
c)Enter the password one more time on the Confirm Password to
confirm your choice.
•Scan Format appears only when you selected the Scan
destination to My Documents.
•If you want to scan from the default setting, press Start.
9. Scanning begins.
•Scanned image is saved in computer’s My Documents > My
Pictures > Samsung folder.
•You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Samsung Scan and
Fax Manager program.
•You can also scan by pressing Window’s Start > Control Panel >
Samsung Scan and Fax Manager > Quick Scan.
Scanning to Email
You can scan and send an image as an email attachment. First, you need to
set up your email account in SyncThru™ Web Service (See "Setting up an
e-mail account" on page 2).
Before scanning, you can set the scan options for your scan job (See
"Changing the settings for each scan job" on page 3).
1. Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.
2. Place a single document face down on the document glass, or load the
documents face up into the ADF.
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on page 1.
Scanning_ 2
3. Press
Changing the default scan settings
(Scan) on the control panel.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Scan to Email appears on the bottom line
of the display and press OK.
If you registered login ID (user name) and password on
SyncThru™ Web Service, My Log in ID and Password appear.
Enter the login ID and password to your machine. Go to step 6.
5. When From appears on the top line of the display, enter the sender’s
email address and press OK.
6. When DestinationEmail appears on the top line of the display, enter the
recipient’s email address and press OK.
If you have set up Address Book, you can use a speed button or a speed
email or group email number to retrieve an address from memory (See
"Setting up Address Book" on page 6).
7. To enter additional addresses, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
step 6.
To continue to the next step, press the left/right arrow to select No and
press OK.
8. If the display asks if you want to send the email to your account, press
the left/right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK.
9. Enter an email subject and press OK.
10. Press the left/right arrow until the file format you want appears and press
OK or Start (Black or Color).
The machine begins scanning and then sends the email.
11. If the machine asks if you want to log off your account, press the
left/right arrow to select Yes or No and press OK.
12. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Changing the settings for each scan job
Your machine provides you with the following setting options to allow you to
customize your scan jobs.
• Scan Size: Sets the image size.
• Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.
• Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
• Scan Color: Sets the color mode.
• Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved. If
you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple pages.
Depending on the selected scan type, this option may not appear.
To customize the settings before starting a scan job
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185, CLX-3185N and CLX-3185WK, press Menu on the
control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
(Scan) and Menu in
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
order on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Scan Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press
OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears
and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change other settings.
When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
To avoid having to customize the scan settings for each job, you can set up
default scan settings for each scan type.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185, CLX-3185N and CLX-3185WK, press Menu on the
control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
(Scan) and Menu in
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
order on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Scan Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Change Default appears.
Press the left/right arrow until the scan type you want appears and press
OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the scan setting option you want appears
and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.
Repeat steps 6 and 7 to change other settings.
To change the default settings for other scan types, press Back and
repeat from step 5.
Press Stop/Clear to return mode.
Setting up Address Book
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently
via SyncThru™ Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email
addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address
book.
Registering speed email numbers
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go
to access SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2. Click Address Book on the menu tab in the top of the website.
3. The Individual Address Book page appears on the middle pane of the
website.
4. Click Add to enter the contact information you want to register.
5. The Add windows appears.
Enter the contact information such as Name, E-mail address and Fax
Number. Also, you can specify the Speed No.
6. Click Apply.
You can also import and export your address book via SyncThru™
Web Service.
Grouping addresses in Groups Address Book
1. Turn your network-connected computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser.
(Example: http://123.123.123.123)
3. Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
If necessary, you can change the language in the upper right
corner of the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Login.on the upper right of the website.
The Login window appears.
5. Type in the ID and Password, and then click Login.
If it is your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the
below default ID and password.
Scanning_ 3
Searching with a particular first letter
•ID: admin
•Password: sec00000
1.Press Address Book until Search & Send appears on the bottom line
of the display and press OK.
2.Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want appears
and press OK.
3.Press the left/right arrow until ID appears and press OK.
4.Enter the first few letters of the name you want appears and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press
OK.
If you do not use the SyncThru™ Web Service for five minutes, it
automatically gets logged out.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Click Address Book on the top of menu bar.
Click E-mail Groups.
Click Add Group. Then the Add window appears.
Enter the group name you want in the Group Name input area.
Specify the Speed No. from the drop-down list.
10. Select Add individual(s) after this group is created check box.
Printing Address Book
If you do not want to add individual addresses to the group
address you made, skip this step. You can add individual
addresses next time.
11. Click Apply. Then the Add window appears.
12. Check the addresses you want to add to E-mail Group Address Book
from the Individual Address Book.
13. Click the arrow in the middle. The selected addresses are added in
E-mail Group Address Book.
14. Click Apply.
Using Address Book entries
Speed email numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an
email, enter the speed email number at which you stored the address
you want.
•For a one-digit speed email location, press and hold the corresponding
digit button from the number keypad.
•For a two- or three-digit speed email location, press the first digit
button(s) and then hold down the last digit button.
You can search through memory for an entry by pressing Address
Book (See "Searching Address Book for an entry" on page 4“).
You can check your address Book settings by printing a list.
1. Press Address Book until Print appears on the bottom of the display.
2. Press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press
OK.
4. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing.
The selected information prints out.
Using Samsung Scan and Fax Manager
If you have installed the printer driver, the Samsung Scan and Fax Manager
program is installed too. For program information and the scanner’s status,
start Samsung Scan and Fax Manager. With this program, you can change
scan settings and add or delete the folders where scanned documents are
saved in your computer.
The Samsung Scan and Fax Manager program can only be used in
the Windows and Mac OS system. If you use the Macintosh, See
"Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager" on page 7.
1.
You can open Samsung Scan and Fax Manager by right clicking
the Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and selecting Scan
Manager.
Group email numbers
To use a group email entry, you need to search for and select it from
memory.
When you are prompted to enter a destination address while sending an
email, press Address Book (See "Searching Address Book for an
entry" on page 4).
Searching Address Book for an entry
There are two ways to search for an address in memory. You can either
scan from A to Z sequentially or search by entering the first letters of the
name associated with the address.
From the Start menu, click Control Panel > Samsung Scan and Fax
Manager.
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan and Fax
Manager window.
3. Press Properties.
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the file saving
destination and scan settings, to add or delete application program, and
to change the file format to be saved.
You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab
(Local or Network).
5. When setting is done, press OK.
Searching sequentially through memory
1.Press Address Book until Search & Send appears on the bottom line
of the display and press OK.
2.Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want appears
and press OK.
3.Press OK when All appears.
4.Press the left/right arrow until the name and address you want
appears. You can search upwards or downwards through the entire
memory in alphabetical order.
Scanning_ 4
Set Scan Button tab
Change Port tab
Scan Destination
Local Scanner
•Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently
linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program
you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel
Destination List.
•Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to open
scanned image.
•Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to
Available Destination List.
•Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the
user in the Available Destination List.
•File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be
saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF and TIFF.
Select when your machine is connected via USB port.
Network Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via network port.
•Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your machine.
•IP or Host name: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your
machine.
Scan Assistant
When you press Quick Scan in Samsung Scan and Fax Manager, the
Scan Assistant window appears. Scan Assistant allows you to adjust
scan settings and start the scanning process.
In the Basic mode, Scan settings and Preferences are available only.
If you want to use more settings, press Advanced.
Scan Property
•Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.
•Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default saving
folder.
•Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.
•Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.
•Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.
•ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does not
support this option, it will be grayed out.
•Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied scan
options. You can modify the options before scanning.
•Default: Allows you to go back to default options.
•Favorites: Allows you to save the current preferences settings for
future use. When you save Favorites, all current scan settings are
saved. To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorites drop
down list. The machine is now set to scan according to the setting
you selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Favorites
drop down list and click Delete. To set a favorite as startup, select
the favorite you want to set as startup, then click the Set as default
button.
Scanning_ 5
•Scan settings: The following scan options are available.
-Image Type: Allows you to chose the proper color settings for
image scanning.
-Resolution: Allows you to choose the image resolution.
-Document Size: Allows you to choose the proper size of the
scanned image.
-Document Source: Allows you to choose the device (document
feeder or scan glass) you want to scan with.
-Prompt for additional pages: If this check box is checked, you can
scan pages continuously. This option is useful when you scan
multi-page documents and/or when Document Source is set to
Flatbed (platen glass). In this case a sequence of scanned
images is processed as a single document.
-Pages to Scan: Allows you to specify how many pages are to be
scanned. This option is available when Document Source is set
to ADF(Document feeder).
•Preference: The following scan options are available.
-Auto crop image after preview: If this option is checked, the
scanning area will be automatically adjusted to the image size.
-Preview on program start: If this option is checked, the scanning
area will be selected automatically as shown in the preview.
-Blank page detection: This operation automatically detects
whether the scanned image is blank or not.
-Delete page: Blank pages will be deleted at the end of the
scanning process.
-Separate files: Blank page will work as a scan job separator.
That is, when multiple pages are scanned at once a blank
page will divide scanned image sequence into parts. Each
part will be treated as a separate document (group).
-Start from scanner: If this option is checked, scanning process
is managed using scanner touch screen rather than from the
computer. The option is not available for some scanner
models.
•Advanced: In the Advanced mode, additional options such as Image
Adjustment, Image Enhancement, and Additional Settings are
available.
-Image Adjustment: Allows you to perform some transformations of
the scanned image. These transformations include automatic
adjustment of image size, straightening and rotation.
-Image Enhancement: Allows you to remove various defects of the
image and improve its quality.
-Additional settings: Allows special processing of scanned images.
These transformations include stitching several partial image
scans into a single image, processing of scanned books and
watermark stamping.
Click the Help button from the lower-left corner of the window and
click on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window
appears with information about that option's feature which is
provided from the Scan Assistant.
Scanning with TWAIN-enabled software
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will need to use
TWAIN-compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop.
Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN-compliant software.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on
page 1).
3. Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop.
4. Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
5. Scan and save your scanned image.
Scanning using the WIA driver
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for
scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided by
Microsoft Windows XP and works with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike
the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust
images without using additional software.
The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista with a USB port.
Windows XP
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 1).
3. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Scanners and Cameras.
4. Double-click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and Camera
wizard appears.
5. Click Next.
6. Set the option in Choose scanning preferences window and click
Preview to see how your options affect the picture.
7. Click Next.
8. Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to save the
picture.
9. Your picture has been successfully copied to your computer. Choose
one of the options on screen.
10. Click Next.
11. Click Finish.
Windows Vista
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 1).
3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Scanners and Cameras.
4. Double-click Scan a document or picture. Windows Fax and Scan
application appears.
•You can click on View scanners and cameras to view scanners,
•If there is no Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint
program and from the File click From Scanner or Camera...
5. Click New Scan. Scan driver appears.
6. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.
7. Click Scan.
If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel button on the
Scanning_ 6
Scanner and Camera wizard.
Select your machine in TWAIN devices option. Make sure that Use
TWAIN software check box is checked, and click Connect.
•If a warning message appears, click Change Port.. to select port.
•If TWAIN UI appears, from the Preference tab, click Change Port.. to
select port.
Windows 7
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass
(See "Loading originals" on page 1).
3. From the Start menu select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
4. Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes
> Start Scan. New Scan application appears.
5. Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your
preferences affect the picture.
6. Click Scan.
Refer to scan manager for Change port.. use (See "Setting
scan information in Scan and Fax Manager" on page 7).
For Mac OS X 10.5
Make sure that Connected check box is checked beside your machine
in Bonjour Devices.
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X 10.4 steps
above.
6. Set the scan options on this program.
7. Scan and save your scanned image.
•For Mac OS X 10.3, use TWAIN-compliant software.
•For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
•Use TWAIN-compliant software to apply more scan options.
•You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
•Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software. Please
refer to the user’s guide of the software.
•If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X
10.4.7 or higher.
Macintosh scanning
You can scan documents using Image Capture program. Mac OS offers
Image Capture program.
Scanning with USB
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 1).
3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.
Setting scan information in Scan and Fax Manager
When you want to find out about Scan and Fax Manager program
information, to check the installed scan driver's condition, to change
scan settings and to add or delete the folders where scanned
documents to computer are saved in Scan and Fax Manager program,
follow the below steps.
1.From the Smart Panel menu on Status bar, click Scan and Fax
Manager.
2.Select the appropriate machine from the Scan and Fax Manager.
3. Press Properties.
4.Use Set Scan Button to change the file destination or scan settings,
to add or delete application programs, and to format files. You can
change the scanning machine by using Change Port (Local or
Network).
5.When done, press OK.
If No camera or scanner connected message appears,
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists,
refer to the Image Capture’s help.image
4. Set the scan options on this program.
5. Scan and save your scanned image.
•For more information about using Image Capture, refer to the Image
Capture’s help.
•Use TWAIN-compliant software to apply more scan options.
•You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
•Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant software. Please
refer to the user’s guide of the software.
•If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to
the latest version. Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
Linux Scanning
Scanning with network
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.
1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered
on.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on
page 1).
3. Start Applications and click Image Capture.
4. For Mac OS X 10.4 ~ 10.5
Click Devices and click Browse Devices.
For Mac OS X 10.6
Select your device below SHARED. Skip to step 7.
5. For Mac OS X 10.4
Scanning
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
2. Click the
Scanning_ 7
button to switch to Scanners configuration.
Settings" on page 8).
Click Default to restore the default setting for the scan options.
9. When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show you the
progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click Cancel.
10. The scanned image appears.
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar (See "Using the
Image Manager" on page 8).
11. When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.
12. Select the file directory where you want to save the image and enter the
file name.
13. Click Save.
3. Select the scanner on the list.
Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings for later use.
To save a new Job Type setting
If you use only one machine device and it is connected to the computer
and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is automatically
selected.
If you have two or more scanners connected to your computer, you can
select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while acquisition is
in progress on the first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set
the device options and start the image acquisition simultaneously.
4. Click Properties.
5. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "Loading originals" on page 1).
6. From the Scanner Properties window, click Preview.
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the
Preview Pane.
1.Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
2.Click Save As.
3.Enter the name for your setting.
4.Click OK.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job
1.Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down list.
2.The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved
setting is automatically selected for the scan job.
To delete a Job Type setting
1.Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down
list.
2.Click Delete.
The setting is deleted from the list.
Using the Image Manager
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and
tools to edit your scanned image.
7. Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview
Pane.
8. Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area sections.
•Image Quality: This option allows you to select the color composition
and the scan resolution for the image.
•Scan Area: This option allows you to select the page size. The
Advanced button enables you to set the page size manually.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select the
option from the Job Type drop-down list (See "Adding Job Type
Use the following tools to edit the image.
Scanning_ 8
Tools
Name
Function
Save
Saves the image.
Undo
Cancels your last action.
Redo
Restores the action you canceled.
Scroll
Allows you to scroll through the image.
Crop
Crops the selected image area.
Zoom Out
Zooms the image out.
Zoom In
Zooms the image in.
Scale
Allows you to scale the image size; you can
enter the size manually, or set the rate to scale
proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.
Rotate
Allows you to rotate the image; you can select
the number of degrees from the drop-down list.
Flip
Allows you to flip the image vertically or
horizontally.
Brightness
Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast
of the image, or to invert the image.
Properties
Shows the properties of the image.
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the on
screen help.
Scanning_ 9
faxing (clx-3185fn/clx-3185fw only)
1.
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Preparing to fax
Using a fax in your computer
Sending a fax in your machine
Receiving a fax in your machine
•You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For
more information ask your internet service provider.
•We recommend using traditional analog phone services (PSTN:
Public Switched Telephone Network) when connecting telephone
lines to use a fax machine. If you use other Internet services (DSL,
ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the
Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals
and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL
Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet
service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.
Adjusting the document settings
Forwarding a fax to another destination
Setting up Address Book
Printing sent fax report automatically
depending on your application.
3. Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window
4. Click Print or OK. Then, a windows like the image below will appear.
1 Line port
2 Micro filter
3 DSL modem / Telephone line
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your
model. Check your model name.
(See "Features by Models" on page 2).
Preparing to fax
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord
to your telephone wall jack. Refer to the Quick Installation Guide how to
make a connection. The method of making a telephone connection is
different from one country to another.
5. Enter the recipients’ number and set the options if necessary.
If you want to use a cover page, check Use cover page.
Check Notify me on delivery, when the fax is delivered to the recipient
successfully.
6. Click Send.
For the more information about Samsung Network PC Fax, click
Help.
Checking a sent fax list (Windows)
Using a fax in your computer
You can check a sent fax list on your computer.
From the Start menu, click Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Network PC Fax > Fax Journal. Then, the Fax Journal
appears with the fax list you have sent.
You can send and receive a fax from your computer without going to the
machine.
Sending a fax (Macintosh)
Sending a fax (Windows)
To send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the
printer driver.
1. Open the document to be sent.
2. Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
To send a fax from your computer, the Fax Utilities program must be
installed. This program is installed when you install the printer driver.
The following steps are based on the Mac OS X 10.5 or 10.6. Depending on
the OS version, the following steps will be different.
1. Open the document to be sent.
2. Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
Faxing (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 1
In case of Mac OS X 10.3 or 10.4, select PDF and Fax PDF.
3. Select CLX-3180 Series fax-USB from the drop-down list in Printer.
4. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you
want to fax.
5. Choose your paper size, orientation, and scale.
6. Enter the recipients’ fax number into To’s input area. You can also use
Addresses pressing button, if you have stored frequently used fax
numbers.
7. If necessary, enter the access code in Dialing Prefix input area.
8. If necessary, you can send the fax with cover page, check Use Cover
Page.
Enter the subject and message of the fax job.
You can set more detailed options for cover page option in
Samsung Fax Cover Page. Select Samsung Fax Cover Page
from the drop-down list under Orientation.
9. Click Fax.
10. The Fax Journal icon appears on your Macintosh dock. Click the icon.
You can see the status of the fax job. You can also delete, hold, resume,
and pause the fax job.
Sending a fax in your machine
This part explains how to send a fax and the special methods of
transmission.
When you place the originals, you can use either the document feeder
or the scanner glass (See "Loading originals" on page 1). If the
originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner
glass, the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first,
which has higher priority in scanning.
Setting the fax header
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on
any fax you send.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Setup appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Machine ID appears and press OK.
5. Enter your name or the company name using the number keypad. You
can enter alphanumeric characters using the number keypad, and
include special symbols by pressing the 1 button. For details on how to
enter alphanumeric characters, see "Entering characters using the
number keypad (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)" on page 2.
6. Press OK to save the ID.
7. Press the left/right arrow until Machine Fax No. appears and press OK.
8. Enter your fax number using the number keypad and press OK.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Sending a fax
1. Press
4. Enter the receiving fax machine’s number.
You can use speed dial numbers, or group dial numbers. For details
about storing and searching for a number, see "Setting up Address
Book" on page 6.
5. Press Color Start or Black Start on the control panel. The machine
starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.
•If you want to send fax directly from your computer, use Samsung
Network PC Fax (See "Sending a fax (Windows)" on page 1).
•When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear before the
machine start transmission.
•If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message
asking to place another page.
Sending a fax manually
This method is sending a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 5).
4. Press On Hook Dial on the control panel or lift the handset.
5. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
6. Press Color Start or Black Start when you hear a high-pitched fax
signal from the remote fax machine.
When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop/Clear at any time while
sending.
Confirming a transmission
When the last page of your original has been sent successfully, the machine
beeps and returns to ready mode.
When something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message
appears on the display. You must treat the malfunction according to the
error messages on the display (See "Understanding display messages" on
page 5 for a list of error messages and their meanings. If you receive an
error message, press Stop/Clear to clear the message and try to send the
fax again.
You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each
time sending a fax is completed (See "Printing sent fax report automatically"
on page 8).
Automatic redialing
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you
send a fax, the machine automatically redials the number every three
minutes, up to seven times according to the factory default settings.
When the display shows Retry Redial?, press OK to redial the number
without waiting. To cancel the automatic redialing, press Stop/Clear.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial
attempts (See "Changing the fax setup options" on page 1).
Redialing the last number
(Fax) on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
(See "On the scanner glass" on page 1 or "In the document feeder
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)" on page 1).
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 5).
To redial the number you called last
1. Press Redial/Pause on the control panel.
2. When an original is loaded in the document feeder, the machine
automatically begins to send.
If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
page. Load another original and press OK. When you have finished,
select No at the Another Page? prompt.
Faxing (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 2
Sending a fax to multiple destinations
You can use the Multiple Send feature, which allows you to send a fax to
multiple locations. Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to
a remote station. After transmission, the originals are automatically erased
from memory. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 5).
4. Press Menu on the control panel.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until Multi Send appears and press OK.
7. Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using
Address book button. For details, see "Setting up Address Book" on
page 6.
8. Enter the second fax number and press OK.
The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
9. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
steps 7 and 8. You can add up to 10 destinations.
10. Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial numbers anymore.
11. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.
12. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
pages. Load another original and press OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the
order in which you entered them.
Delaying a fax transmission
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present. You cannot send a color fax using this feature.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 5).
4. Press Menu on the control panel.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until Delay Send appears and press OK.
7. Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using
Address book button. For details, see "Setting up Address Book" on
page 6.
8. The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document.
9. To enter more fax numbers, press OK when Yes appears and repeat
steps 7. You can add up to 10 destinations.
Once you entered a group dial number, you cannot enter another
group dial numbers anymore.
10. When you have finished entering fax numbers, press the left/right arrow
to select No at the Another No.? prompt and press OK.
11. Enter the job name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters, see "Entering
characters using the number keypad (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)"
on page 2.
If you do not want to assign a name, skip this step.
12. Enter the time using the number keypad and press OK.
If you set a time earlier than the current time, the fax will be sent at
that time on the following day.
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
13. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
pages. Load another original and press OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine returns to ready mode. The display reminds you that you
are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set.
Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved
in memory.
1.Load the originals to be added and adjust document settings.
2.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
3.Press Menu on the control panel.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow until Add Page appears and press OK.
6.Press the left/right arrow until the fax job you want appears and press
OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine scans the original into memory.
7.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Canceling a reserved delay fax job
You can cancel the delayed fax job which is saved in memory.
1.Press Menu on the control panel.
2.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Cancel Job appears and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow until the fax job you want appears and press
OK.
6.Press OK when Yes appears.
The selected fax is deleted from memory.
7.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Sending a priority fax
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority
transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between
stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before
transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2. Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3. Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs (See
"Adjusting the document settings" on page 5).
4. Press Menu on the control panel.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
Faxing (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 3
6. Press the left/right arrow until Priority Send appears and press OK.
7. Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK.
You can press speed dial numbers or select group dial number using
Address book button. For details, see "Setting up Address Book" on
page 6.
8. Enter the job name you want and press OK.
The original is scanned into memory before transmission.
9. If an original is placed on the scanner glass, select Yes to add another
pages. Load another original and press OK.
When you have finished, select No at the Another Page? prompt.
The machine starts to scan and send a fax to destinations.
Receiving a fax in your machine
This part explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving methods
available.
Changing the receive modes
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode to
another mode, follow the steps below.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Receive Mode appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the fax reception mode you want appears.
•Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax
reception mode.
•Tel: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then Start. If your
machine has a handset, you can receive a fax by picking up the
handset.
•Ans/Fax: Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine.
Your machine answers an incoming call, and the caller can leave a
message on the answering machine. If the fax machine senses a fax
tone on the line, the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to
receive the fax.
•DRPD: you can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern
Detection (DRPD) feature. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company
service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers. For further details, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 4.
7. Press OK to save your selection.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
•To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the
EXT socket on the back of your machine.
•If you do not want other people to view your received documents,
you can use secure receiving mode. In this mode, all of the
received faxes are stored in memory. For further details, see
"Receiving in secure receiving mode" on page 5.
Receiving automatically in Fax mode
Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax.
To change the number of rings, see "Fax setup (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
only)" on page 1.
Receiving manually in Tel mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing
Black Start or Color Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote
machine.
The machine begins receiving a fax and returns to ready mode when the
reception is completed.
Receiving faxes manually using an extension
telephone
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive
a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without
going to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press
the keys *9* on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote machine, try pressing *9* once again.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last
asterisks are fixed, but you can change the middle number to whatever you
wish. For details about changing the code, see "Changing the fax setup
options" on page 1
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax
mode
To use this mode, you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket
on the back of your machine (See "Rear view" on page 5).
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message
as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
•If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to
EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after
a predefined number of rings.
•If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set the
machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
•If you are in Tel mode when the answering machine is connected to
your machine, you must switch off the answering machine.
Otherwise, the outgoing message from the answering machine will
interrupt your phone conversation.
Receiving faxes using DRPD mode
Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to
use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers.
The particular number someone uses to call you is identified by different
ringing patterns, which consist of various combinations of long and short
ringing sounds. This feature is often used by answering services who
answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which
number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone.
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) feature, your fax
machine can learn the ring pattern you designate to be answered. Unless
you change it, this ringing pattern will continue to be recognized and
Faxing (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 4
answered as a fax call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to the
extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.
You can easily suspend or change DRPD at any time.
Before using the DRPD option, Distinctive Ring service must be installed on
your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up DRPD, you will
need another telephone line at your location, or someone available to dial
your fax number from outside.
To set up the DRPD mode
1. Press
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Receiving appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Receive Mode appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until DRPD appears and press OK.
Waiting Ring appears on the display.
7. Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to
place the call from a fax machine.
8. When your machine begins to ring, do not answer the call. The machine
requires several rings to learn the pattern.
When the machine completes learning, the display shows Completed
DRPD Setup. If the DRPD setup fails, Error DRPD Ring appears.
Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 6.
•DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or
connect the machine to another telephone line.
•After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify
that the machine answers with a fax tone. Then have a call
placed to a different number assigned to that same line to be
sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or
answering machine plugged into the EXT socket.
Receiving in secure receiving mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory. When the mode is
deactivated, any stored faxes are printed.
Activating secure receiving mode
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Deactivating secure receiving mode
1.Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in
“Activating secure receiving mode.”
2.Press the left/right arrow until Off appears and press OK.
3.Enter the four-digit password and press OK.
The mode is deactivated and the machine prints all faxes stored in
memory.
4.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1. Press
3.Enter the four-digit password and press OK.
The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory.
(Fax) on the control panel.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Secure Receive appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK.
Enter a four-digit password you want to use and press OK.
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or
printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon
as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
Adjusting the document settings
Before starting a fax, change the following settings according to your
original’s status to get the best quality.
Resolution
The default document settings produces good results when using typical
text-based originals. However, if you send originals that are of poor quality,
or contain photographs, you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher
quality fax.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Resolution appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press
OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Recommended resolution settings for different original document types are
described in the table below.
mode
recommended for
Standard
Originals with normal sized characters
Fine
Originals containing small characters or thin lines or
originals printed using a dot-matrix printer
Super Fine
Originals containing extremely fine detail. Super Fine
mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are
communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution.
You can activate secure receiving mode without setting a
password, but cannot protect your faxes.
•For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is
not available. The resolution setting is
automatically changed to Fine.
•When your machine is set to Super Fine
resolution and the fax machine with which you
are communicating does not support Super
Fine resolution, the machine transmits using
the highest resolution mode supported by the
other fax machine.
7. Re-enter the password to confirm it and press OK.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
When a fax is received in secure receiving mode, your machine stores it in
memory and shows Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax
received.
Printing received faxes
1.Access the Secure Receive menu by following steps 1 through 4 in
“Activating secure receiving mode.”
2.Press the left/right arrow until Print appears and press OK.
Photo Fax
Originals containing shades of gray or photographs
Faxing (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 5
The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
default setting, see "Change Default" on page 2.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Darkness appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press
OK.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
10. Enter the ending time using left/right arrow or numeric keypad and press
OK.
11. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
Forwarding a sent fax to email address
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to another
destination.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
Forwarding a sent fax to another destination
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until E-mail appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK.
Enter the sender’s email address when From appears on the display
and press OK.
9. Enter the recipient’s email address when DestinationEmail appears on
the display and press OK.
10. Then, the setting is saved.
11. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email address.
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to another
destination.
Forwarding a received fax to email address
The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job. To change the
default setting, see "Change Default" on page 2.
Forwarding a fax to another destination
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other
destination by a fax. If you are out of office but have to receive the fax, this
feature may be useful.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Send Forward appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK.
Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and
press OK.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Forwarding a received fax to another destination
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to another
destination. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in the memory
then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.
1. Press
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
(Fax) on the control panel.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Rcv. Forward appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward & Print.
8. Enter the number of the fax machine to which faxes are to be sent and
press OK.
9. Enter the starting time using left/right arrow or numeric keypad and
press OK.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to another
destination. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in the memory
then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Feature appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until E-mail appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Rcv. Forward appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Forward appears and press OK.
To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been
completed, select Forward & Print.
8. Enter the sender’s email address when From appears on the display
and press OK.
9. Enter the recipient’s email address when DestinationEmail appears on
the display and press OK.
10. Then, the setting is saved.
11. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified email address.
Setting up Address Book
You can set up Address Book with the fax numbers you use most
frequently. Your machine provides you with the following features for setting
up Address Book.
Before beginning to store fax numbers, make sure that your machine
is in Fax mode.
Speed dial numbers
You can store up to 240 frequently-used fax numbers in speed dial
numbers.
Faxing (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 6
Registering a speed dial number
1.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.Press Address Book on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until New & Edit appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Speed Dial appears and press OK.
5.Enter a speed dial number between 1 and 240 and press OK.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display
shows the message to allow you to change it. To start over with
another speed dial number, press Back.
6.Enter the name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters (See "Entering
characters using the number keypad (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
only)" on page 2).
7.Enter the fax number you want and press OK.
8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Editing speed dial numbers
1.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.Press Address Book on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until New & Edit appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Speed Dial appears and press OK.
5.Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK.
6.Change the name and press OK.
7.Change the fax number and press OK.
8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Using speed dial numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a
fax, enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you
want.
•For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the
corresponding digit button on the number keypad.
•For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)
and then hold down the last digit button.
You can also search through memory for an entry by pressing Address
Book (See "Searching Address Book for an entry" on page 7).
Group dial numbers
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can
group these destinations and set them under a group dial number. You can
then use a group dial number to send a document to all of the destinations
within the group. You can set up to 200 (1 through 200) group dial numbers
using the destination’s existing speed dial numbers.
Registering a group dial number
1.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.Press Address Book on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until New & Edit appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK.
5.Enter a group dial number between 1 and 200 and press OK.
If an entry is already stored in the number you choose, the display
shows the message to allow you to change it.
6.Enter the name you want and press OK.
For details on how to enter alphanumeric characters (See "Entering
characters using the number keypad (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
only)" on page 2).
7.Enter the speed dial number you want and press OK.
8.Press OK when the speed dial information appears correctly.
9.Press OK when Yes appears at the Add? prompt.
10.Press OK when Yes appears at the Another No.? prompt.
Repeat steps 7 and 10 to include other speed dial numbers into the
group.
11.When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the
Another No.? prompt and press OK.
12.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Editing a group dial number
1.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.Press Address Book on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until New & Edit appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until Group Dial appears and press OK.
5.Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK.
6.Enter the name you want to edit and press OK.
7.Enter the speed dial number you want to add or delete and press OK.
8.Press OK when the speed dial information appears correctly.
If you entered a new speed dial number, Add? appears.
If you enter a speed dial number stored in the group, Delete?
appears.
9.Press OK to add or delete the number.
10.Press OK when Yes appears to add or delete more numbers and
repeat steps 7 and 8.
11.When you have finished, press the left/right arrow to select No at the
Another No.? and press OK.
12.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Using group dial numbers
To use a group dial entry, you need to search for and select it from
memory.
When you are prompted to enter a fax number while sending a fax,
press Address Book. See below.
Searching Address Book for an entry
There are two ways to search for a number in memory. You can either scan
from A to Z sequentially, or you can search by entering the first letters of the
name associated with the number.
Searching sequentially through the memory
1.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.Press Address Book on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Search & Dial appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want appears
and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow until All appears and press OK.
6.Press the left/right arrow until the name and number you want
appears.
Searching with a particular first letter through the
memory
1.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.Press Address Book on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Search & Dial appears and press OK.
Faxing (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 7
4.Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want appears
and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow until ID appears and press OK.
6.Enter the first few letters of the name you want.
7.Press the left/right arrow until the name and number you want
appears.
Deleting a Address Book for entry
1.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.Press Address Book on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Delete appears and press OK.
4.Press the left/right arrow until the number category you want appears
and press OK.
5.Press the left/right arrow until the searching method you want appears
and press OK.
Select Search All to search for an entry by scanning through all
entries in Address Book.
Select Search ID to search for an entry by the first few letters of the
name.
6.Press the left/right arrow until the name you want appears and press
OK.
Or, enter the first letters. Press the left/right arrow until the name you
want appears and press OK.
7.Press OK when Yes appears to confirm the deletion.
8.Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Printing Address Book
You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list.
1.Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2.Press Address Book on the control panel.
3.Press the left/right arrow until Print appears and press OK.
The machine begins printing.
Printing sent fax report automatically
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the
previous 50 communication operations, including time and dates.
1. Press
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(Fax) on the control panel.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Fax Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Auto Report appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until On appears and press OK.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Faxing (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)_ 8
using usb memory device
(clx-3185n/clx-3185fn/clx-3185wk/clx-3185f
w only)
1.
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
About USB memory
Plugging in a USB memory device
Scanning to a USB memory device
About USB memory
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded
music and videos, high resolution photographs or whatever other files you
want to store or move.
You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device.
• Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device
• Print data stored on a USB memory device
• Restore backup files to the machine’s memory
• Format the USB memory device
• Check the available memory space
•
•
•
Printing from a USB memory device
Backing up data
Managing USB memory
•If your USB memory device has certain features such as security
settings and password settings, your machine may not
automatically detect it. For details about these features, see the
user’s guide of the USB memory device.
Scanning to a USB memory device
Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models. Check your model name.
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB
memory device. There are two ways of doing this: you can scan to the
device using the default settings or you can customize your own scan
settings.
Plugging in a USB memory device
The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB
V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory
devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type
connector.
A
B
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.
Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility certification;
otherwise, the machine might not recognize it.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the front of your
machine.
•Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in
operation or writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine
warranty does not cover damage caused by user’s misuse.
Scanning
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass.
For details about loading an original, see "Loading originals" on page 1.
3. Press
(Scan) on the control panel.
4. Press OK when Scan to USB appears on the bottom line of the display.
Press Color Start or Black Start when Ready to Scan appears.
Regardless of the button you press, the color mode is decided as
customized (See “"Customizing Scan to USB" on page 2).
Using USB memory device (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)_ 1
Your machine begins scanning the original, and then asks if you want to
scan another page.
5. Press OK when Yes appears to scan more pages. Load another original
to be scanned and press Color Start or Black Start.
Regardless of the button you press, the color mode is decided as
customized (See “"Customizing Scan to USB" on page 2).
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.
After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device from
the machine.
Customizing Scan to USB
You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to
USB job.
1. Press
3.
4.
5.
6.
(Scan) on the control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press Menu on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Scan Feature appears and press OK.
Press OK when USB Feature appears.
Press the left/right arrow until the setting option you want appears and
press OK.
You can set the following options.
•Scan Size: Sets the image size.
•Original Type: Sets the original document’s type.
•Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
•Scan Color: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option, you
cannot select JPEG in Scan Format.
•Scan Format: Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved.
When you select TIFF or PDF, you can select to scan multiple
pages. If you select JPEG in this option, you cannot select Mono in
Scan Color.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears and press OK.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set other setting options.
8. When you have finished, press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
You can change the default scan settings. For details, see "Changing the
default scan settings" on page 3.
Printing from a USB memory device
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print
TIFF, BMP, JPEG and PRN files.
File types supported by Direct Print option
• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible.
• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be
printed directly from USB memory. See "Printing to a file (PRN)" on
page 6 to learn how to create a PRN file.
• BMP: BMP Uncompressed
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
• JPEG: JPEG Baseline
To print a document from a USB memory device
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine, and then press Direct USB. If one has already been inserted,
press Direct USB.
2. Press OK when USB print appears.
7.
8.
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on
it.
Press the left/right arrow until the folder or file you want appears and
press OK.
If you see [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more files or
folders in the selected folder.
If you selected a file, skip to the next step.
If you selected a folder, press the left/right arrow until the file you want
appears.
Press the left/right arrow to select the number of copies to be printed or
enter the number.
Press OK, Color Start or Black Start to start printing the selected file.
There are two types of mode as following.
• OK or Color Start: Color print
• Black Start: Black and White print
After printing the file, the display asks if you want to print another job.
Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step
2.
Otherwise, press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Backing up data
Data in the machine’s memory can be accidentally erased due to power
failure or storage failure. Backup helps you protect the system settings by
storing them as backup files on a USB memory device.
Backing up data
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Export Setting appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears.
For CLX-3185N/3185WK, Setup Data option is only available.
For CLX-3185FN/3185FW, Setup Data and Address Book options are
available.
7. Press OK to begin backing up the data.
The data is backed up to the USB memory.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Restoring data
1. Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to
the USB memory port.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when Machine Setup appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Import Setting appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the data type you want appears and press
OK.
For CLX-3185N, Setup Data option is only available.
For CLX-3185FN/3185FW, Setup Data and Address Book options are
available.
7. Press the left/right arrow until the file containing the data you want to
restore appears and press OK.
Using USB memory device (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)_ 2
8. Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.
9. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Managing USB memory
You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or
all at once by reformatting the device.
After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device, files cannot
be restored. Therefore, confirm that you no longer need the data
before deleting it.
Deleting an image file
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Direct USB.
3. Press the left/right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK.
4. Press OK when Delete appears.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the folder or file you want to delete
appears and press OK.
If you see [D] in the front of a folder name, there are one or more
files or folders in the selected folder.
If you selected a file, the display shows the size of the file for about
2 seconds. Go to the next step.
If you selected a folder, press the left/right arrow until the file you want to
delete appears and press OK.
6. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Formatting a USB memory device
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Direct USB.
3. Press the left/right arrow until File Manage appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Format appears and press OK.
5. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm your selection.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Viewing the USB memory status
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and
saving documents.
1. Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Press Direct USB.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Check Space appears and press OK.
4. The available memory space appears on the display.
Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Using USB memory device (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only)_ 3
machine status and advanced feature
1.
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced
machine setup. Read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Fax setup (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Copy setup
Printing a report
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Clearing memory
Network (CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Menu overview
Option
ECM Mode
This mode helps with poor line quality and
makes sure any faxes you send are sent
smoothly to any other ECM-equipped fax
machine. Sending a fax using ECM may take
more time.
Send Report
You can set your machine to print a confirmation
report showing whether a transmission was
successful, how many pages were sent, and
more. The available options are On, Off, and
On-Error, which prints only when a transmission
is not successful.
Image TCR
This function allows users to know what fax
messages have been sent by showing sent
messages in the transmission report.
The first page of the message is turned into an
image file that is printed on the transmission
report so the users can see what messages
have been sent.
However, you can not use this function when
sending fax without saving the data in the
memory.
Fax setup (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Changing the fax setup options
Your machine provides you with various user-selectable options for setting
up the fax system. You can change the default settings for your preferences
and needs.
To change the fax setup options:
1. Press
(Fax) on the control panel.
2. Press Menu on the control panel.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Fax Setup appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the fax setup item you want appears and
press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the option you want appears and press
OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the desired status appears or enter the
value for the option you have selected, and press OK.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 if necessary.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Sending
Option
Description
Receiving
Description
Option
Description
Redial Times
You can specify the number of redial attempts. If
you enter 0, the machine will not redial.
Receive Mode
Redial Term
Your machine can automatically redial a remote
fax machine if it was busy. You can set an
interval between attempts.
You can select the default fax receiving mode.
For details on receiving faxes in each mode, see
"Changing the receive modes" on page 4.
Ring To Answer
You can set a prefix of up to five digits. This
number dials before any automatic dial number
is started. It is useful for accessing a PABX
exchange.
You can specify the number of times the
machine rings before answering an incoming
call.
Stamp RCV Name
This option allows the machine to automatically
print the page number, and the date and time of
reception at the bottom of each page of a
received fax.
RCV Start Code
This code allows you to initiate fax reception
from an extension phone plugged into the EXT
socket on the back of the machine. If you pick up
the extension phone and hear fax tones, enter
the code. It is preset to *9* at the factory.
Prefix Dial
Machine status and advanced feature_ 1
Option
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Junk Fax Setup
DRPD Mode
Change Default
Description
When receiving a fax containing pages as long
as or longer than the paper loaded in the paper
tray, the machine can reduce the size of the
original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the
machine.
Turn on this feature if you want to automatically
reduce an incoming page.
With this feature set to Off, the machine cannot
reduce the original to fit onto one page. The
original will be divided and printed in actual size
on two or more pages.
Option
Resolution
When receiving a fax containing pages as long
as or longer than the paper in your machine, you
can set the machine to discard a specific length
from the end of the received fax. The machine
will print the received fax on one or more sheets
of paper, minus the data that would have been
on the specified discard segment.
When the received fax contains pages larger
than the paper in your machine, and Auto
Reduction has been turned on, the machine will
reduce the fax to fit on the existing paper, and
nothing will be discarded.
This setting may not be available depending on
your country. Using this feature, the system will
not accept faxes sent from remote stations
whose numbers are stored in the memory as
junk fax numbers. This feature is useful for
blocking any unwanted faxes.
When you turn on this feature, you can access
the following options to set junk fax numbers.
• Add: Allows you to set up to 10 fax numbers.
• Delete: Allows you to delete the desired junk
fax number. If you select Delete All, it allows
you to delete all junk fax numbers.
This mode enables a user to use a single
telephone line to answer several different
telephone numbers. In this menu, you can set
the machine to recognize which ring patterns to
answer. For details about this feature, see
"Receiving faxes using DRPD mode" on page 4.
Description
Changing the resolution setting affects the
appearance of the received document.
• Standard: Originals with normal sized
characters.
• Fine: Originals containing small characters
or thin lines or originals printed using a
dot-matrix printer.
• Super Fine: Originals containing extremely
fine detail. Super Fine mode is enabled only
if the machine with which you are
communicating also supports the Super
Fine resolution.
•For memory transmission, Super Fine
mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically
changed to Fine.
•When your machine is set to Super
Fine resolution and the fax
machine with which you are
communicating does not support
Super Fine resolution, the machine
transmits using the highest
resolution mode supported by the
other fax machine.
•
Photo Fax: Originals containing shades of
gray or photographs.
Darkness
You can select the default contrast mode to fax
your originals lighter or darker.
Scan Size
You can select the size of original.
Auto Report
You can set the machine to print a report with detailed information about the
previous 50 communication operations including time and dates.
For further details, see "Printing sent fax report automatically" on page 8.
Copy setup
Changing the copy setup options
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.
1. Depending on the model, the operating procedure may differ.
•For CLX-3185, CLX-3185N and CLX-3185WK, press Menu on the
control panel.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
•For CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW, press
(Copy) and Menu in
order on the control panel.
Press the left/right arrow until Copy Setup appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until Change Default appears and press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the copy setup item you want appears and
press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the setup option you want appears and
press OK.
Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press
OK.
Machine status and advanced feature_ 2
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6, as needed.
8. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Option
Change Default
Option
Description
Sent Report
This report shows information on the faxes you
have recently sent.
You can set the machine to automatically print
this report every 50 communications (See
"Sending" on page 1).
Fax RCV Report
This report shows information on the faxes you
have recently received.
Schedule Jobs
This list shows the documents currently stored
for delayed faxes along with the starting time
and type of each operation.
JunkFax Report
This list shows the fax numbers specified as junk
fax numbers. To add or delete numbers to or
from this list, access the Junk Fax Setup menu
(See "Receiving" on page 1).
Description
Scan Size
You can select the size of original.
Copies
You can enter the number of copies using the
number keypad.
Copy Collation
You can set the machine to sort the copy job.
For further details, see "Deciding the form of
copy output" on page 3.
Reduce/Enlarge
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied
image.
Darkness
You can adjust the brightness level to make a
copy that is easier to read, when the original
contains faint markings and dark images.
Network Info.
This list shows information on your machine’s
network connection and configuration.
Original Type
You can improve the copy quality by selecting
the document type for the current copy job.
User Auth List
This list shows authorized users, who are
allowed to use the email function.
Eco Copy
You can cut toner consumption and paper usage
by using this option.
PCL Font List
This list shows all the PCL fonts currently
available to your machine.
Fax Option
This list shows the status of the user-selectable
options for fax. You may print this list to confirm
your changes after changing fax settings.
Printing a report
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etc.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Report appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the report or list you want to print appears
and press OK.
To print all reports and lists, select All Report.
5. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm printing.
The selected information prints out.
Option
Description
All Report
You can print reports and lists about all options.
Configuration
This list shows the status of the user-selectable
options. You may print this list to confirm your
changes after changing settings.
Supplies Info
This list shows the current status of
consumables in your machine.
Address Book
This list shows all of the fax numbers currently
stored in the machine’s memory.
Send Report
This report shows the fax number, the number of
pages, the elapsed time of the job, the
communication mode, and the communication
results for a particular fax job.
You can set up your machine to automatically
print a transmission confirmation report after
each fax job (See "Sending" on page 1).
You can also print the machine's status information and browse status
with SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the Web browser on your
network-connected computer and type the IP address of your
machine. When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information >
Print information.
Clearing memory
You can selectively clear information stored in your machine’s memory.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Clear Setting appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want to clear appears and
press OK.
5. Press OK when Yes appears to confirm clearing.
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 to clear another item.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Option
Description
All settings
Clears all of the data stored in memory and
resets all of your settings to the factory default.
Fax Setup
Restores all of the fax options to the factory
default.
Copy Setup
Restores all of the copy options to the factory
default.
Machine status and advanced feature_ 3
Option
Menu overview
Description
Scan Setup
Restores all of the scan options to the factory
default.
System Setup
Restores all of the system options to the factory
default.
Network Setup
Restores all of the network options to the factory
default.
Address Book
Clears all of the fax numbers entries stored in
memory.
Sent Report
Clears all records of sent faxes.
Fax RCV Report
Clears all records of received faxes.
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine
or use the machine’s functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing
Menu.
Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.
Items
Fax Featureb
Darkness
Resolution
Scan Size
Multi Send
Delay Send
Priority Send
Forward
Secure Receive
Add Page
Cancel Job
Fax Setupb
Sending
Redial Times
Redial Term
Prefix Dial
ECM Mode
Send Report
Image TCR
Receiving
Receive Mode
Ring To Answer
Stamp RCV Name
RCV Start Code
Auto Reduction
Discard Size
Junk Fax Setup
DRPD Mode
Change Default
Resolution
Darkness
Scan Size
Auto Report
Copy Feature
Scan Size
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Type
Layout
Adjust Bkgd.
Gray Enhance
Eco Copy
Network
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185
FW only)
You may set up the network with the machine's display screen. Before doing
that, you must have the relevant information concerning the type of network
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to
use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine to the
network.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until Network appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until the setup option you want appears and
press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until the setting you want appears and press
OK.
5. Repeat steps 3 through 4, as needed.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Option
TCP/IP
Description
Select appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment.
There are lots of parameters to be set. If
you are not sure, leave as is, or consult the
network administrator.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
Selects this option to use the network
environment through IPv6 (See "IPv6
Configuration" on page 6).
Ethernet Speed
Configure the network transmission speed.
Wireless
Selects this option to use the wireless network
(See "Wireless network setup
(CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only)" on page 1).
Clear Setting
Reverts the network settings to the default
values.
Network Info.
This list shows information on your machine’s
network connection and configuration.
Option
Machine status and advanced feature_ 4
Items
Option
Copy Setup
Change Default
Scan Size
Copies
Copy Collation
Reduce/Enlarge
Darkness
Original Type
Eco Copya
Scan Feature
USB Feature
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Format
E-mail Feature
Scan Size
Original Type
Resolution
Scan Color
Scan Setup
Change Default
USB Default
E-mail Default
Items
System Setup
Machine status and advanced feature_ 5
Option
Machine Setup
Machine ID
Machine Fax Nob
Date & Timeb
Clock Modeb
Language
Default Mode
Power Save
Timeout
Altitude Adj.
Auto Continue
Import Setting
Export Setting
Paper Setup
Paper Size
Paper Type
Sound/Volume
Key Sound
Alarm Sound
Speakerb
Ringerb
Report
All Report
Configuration
Supplies Info
Address Bookb
Send Reportb
Sent Reportb
Fax RCV Reportb
Schedule Jobsb
JunkFax Reportb
Network Info.c
User Auth Listc
PCL Font List
Fax Optionb
Maintenance
Supplies Life
Color
Serial Number
Clear Setting
All Settings
Fax Setupb
Copy Setup
Scan Setup
System Setup
Network Setupc
Address Bookb
Sent Reportb
Fax RCV Reportb
Items
Networkc
Option
TCP/IP
DHCP
BOOTP
Static
TCP/IP (IPv6)
IPv6 Activate
DHCPv6 Config
Ethernet Speed
Auto
10M Half
10M Full
100M Half
100M Full
Wirelessd
WPS Setting
WLAN Setting
WLAN Default
WLAN Signal
Clear Setting
Network Info.
a. CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN only
b. CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only
c. CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW/CLX-3185WK only
d. CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FW only
Machine status and advanced feature_ 6
management tools
1.
This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
Introducing useful management tools
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Using the Smart Panel program
SmarThru
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the
below default ID and password.
•ID: admin
•Password: sec00000
Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your
model. Check your model name.
(See "Features by Models" on page 2).
Introducing useful management tools
SyncThru™ Web Service overview
The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently.
• "Using SyncThru™ Web Service
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)" on
page 1.
• "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 2.
• "SmarThru" on page 3.
• "Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator" on page 3.
Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.
Information tab
Using SyncThru™ Web Service
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185
FW only)
Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for
SyncThru™ Web Service.
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via SyncThru™
Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™ Web Service to:
• View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
• Change printer preference.
• Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.
• Get support for using the machine.
To access SyncThru™ Web Service
1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service
Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to
log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service
without logging in but you won’t have access to Settings tab and
Security tab.
1.Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service
website.
A log-in page appears.
2.Type in the ID and Password then click Login.
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can
check things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print
reports such as an error report and so on.
•Active Alerts: This item allows you to check the alerts occurred in the
machine and their severity.
•Supplies: This item allows you to check how many pages are printed
and amount of toner left in the cartridge.
•Usage Counters: This item allows you to check the usage count by
print types: simplex, duplex.
•Current Settings: This item allows you to check the machine and
network information.
•Print information: This item allows you to print reports such as
system related reports, e-mail address and font reports.
Settings tab
This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and
network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
•Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by
your machine.
-System: You can set settings related to your machine.
-Printer: You can set settings related to printing jobs.
-E-mail Notification: You can set e-mail notification feature and
e-mail address of recipients who will receive the notification.
•Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the
network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, network
protocols and so on.
-SNMP: You can exchange of management information between
network devices using SNMP.
-Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP): You can set the outgoing e-mail
server.
-Restore Default: You can restore default network settings.
Security tab
This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You
need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab.
Management tools_ 1
•System Security: You can set the system administrator’s information
and also enable or disable machine features.
•Network Security: You can set settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6
filtering, 802.1x, Authentication servers.
Maintenance tab
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and
setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu.
•Firmware Upgrade: You can upgrade your machine’s firmware.
•Contact Information: You can view the contact information.
•Link: You can view the links to useful sites where you can download or
check information.
To use this program, your computer has to meet the following system
requirements:
•Windows. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or
exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 2).
•Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and
HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on
page 2).
•Linux. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or
exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 2).
•Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML
Help.
If you need to know the exact model name of your machine, you can
check the supplied software CD.
E-mail notification setup
Understanding Smart Panel
You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option.
By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and
SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or
machine error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This
option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator.
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3. From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification.
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Smart
Panel.
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart Panel
icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area (in Linux).
If you have not configured outgoing server environment, go to
Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to
configure network environment before setting e-mail notification.
4. Select Enable check box to use the E-mail Notification.
5. Click Add button to add e-mail notification user.
Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items
you want to receive an alert for.
6. Click Apply.
If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In
that case, contact the a network administrator.
Setting the system administrator information
Set the system administrator information. This setting is necessary for using
the e-mail notification option.
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
2. Your machine’s embedded website opens.
3. From the Security tab, select System Security > System
Administrator
4. Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location and E-mail
address.
5. Click Apply.
Using the Smart Panel program
Windows
Double-click this icon in Windows.
Linux
Click this icon in Linux.
Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select
Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver
name > Smart Panel.
•If you have already installed more than one Samsung machine, first
select the correct machine model you want in order to access the
corresponding Smart Panel.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) the Smart Panel icon and select
your machine.
•The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s guide
may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.
In case of Mac OS 10.3
1. Click System Preferences > Print & Fax
2. Click Set up Printers....
3. Select printer in list and double click it.
4. Click Utility.
In case of Mac OS 10.4
1. Click System Preferences > Print & Fax
2. Select printer in list and click Printer Queue....
3. Click Utility.
In case of Mac OS 10.5
1. Click System Preferences > Print & Fax
2. Select printer in list and click Open Printer Queue....
3. Click Utility.
In case of Mac OS 10.6
1. Click System Preferences > Print & Fax
2. Select printer in list and click Open Printer Queue....
The Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine
status, and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. For Windows
and Macintosh, Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the
machine software. For Linux, you can download Smart Panel from the
Samsung website and install (See "Installing the SmartPanel" on page 5).
Management tools_ 2
3. Click Printer Setup > Utility tab > Open Printer Utility.
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine, the
estimated level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge, and various other
types of information. You can also change settings.
4. The SmarThru appears.
2
3
1
4
5
Toner Level
1
2
You can view the level of toner remaining in each
toner cartridge. The machine and the number of
toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may
differ depending on the machine in use. Some
machines do not have this feature.
•Scan to: Allows you to scan an image and save it to an application or
folder, email it, or publish it on a website.
•Image: Allows you to edit an image you have saved as a graphic file
and send it to a selected application or folder, email it, or publish it on
a website.
•Print: Allows you to print images you have saved. You can print images
in black and white or color mode if your machine supports it.
at the top right corner
For more information about SmarThru, click
of the window. The SmarThru help window appears; you can see it
supplied on the SmarThru program.
Buy Now
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from
online.
Follow the steps below to uninstall SmarThru. Before you begin the
uninstall, ensure that all applications are closed on your computer.
User’s Guide
You can view the online User’s Guide.
a)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.
b)Select Samsung Printers > SmarThru 4 > Uninstall SmarThru 4.
c)When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, read the
statement and click OK.
d)Click Finish.
This button changes to Troubleshooting
Guide when error occurs. You can directly
open the troubleshooting section in the
user’s guide.
3
Printer
Setting
You can configure various machine settings in the
Printer Settings Utility window. Some machines do
not have this feature.
4
If you connect your machine to a network,
the SyncThru™ Web Service window
appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility
window.
Driver Setting
5
You can set all of the machine options you need in
the Printing Preferences window. This feature is
available only for Windows (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 2).
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) the Smart Panel icon and select Options.
Select the settings you want from the Options window.
Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator
The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring
machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified
Driver Configurator (See "Installing the Unified Linux Driver" on page 4).
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified
Driver > Unified Driver Configurator.
2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration
window.
SmarThru
The supplied software CD provides you with SmarThru. SmarThru offers
you convenient features to use with your machine.
Starting SmarThru
Follow the steps below to start SmarThru.
1. Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and properly
connected to each other.
2. Once you have installed SmarThru, you will see the SmarThru icon on
your desktop.
3. Double-click the SmarThru icon.
Management tools_ 3
•Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine.
•Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default
machine.
•Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.
•Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working
properly.
•Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties.
Classes tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.
1 Printers
Configuration
2 Scanners
Configuration
3 Ports
Configuration
To use the on screen help, click Help.
3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver
Configurator.
Printers configuration window
Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes.
Printers tab
View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the
machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator
window.
1
Shows all of the machine classes.
2
Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the
class.
•Refresh: Renews the classes list.
•Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class.
•Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class.
1
Switches to Printers configuration.
2
Shows all of the installed machine.
3
Shows the status, model name and URL of your machine.
The printer control buttons are as follows:
•Refresh: Renews the available machines list.
•Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines.
Management tools_ 4
Scanners configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a list of
installed Samsung machine devices, change device properties, and scan
images.
Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status.
3
•
•
Refresh: Renews the available ports list.
Release port: Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via a parallel port
or USB port. Since the machine device contains more than one device
(printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of
“consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port sharing
mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner drivers. The
drivers talk to their devices via so-called machine ports. The current
status of any machine port can be viewed via the Ports configuration.
The port sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of
the machine device, while another block is in use.
When you install a new machine device onto your system, it is strongly
recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver
Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the
new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for
machine’s functionality. For machine scanners, I/O ports are being
chosen by scanner drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied
by default.
1
Switches to Scanners configuration.
2
Shows all of the installed scanners.
3
Shows the vendor, model name and type of your scanner.
•
Properties: Allows you to change the scan properties and scan a
document.
Ports configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of
each port, and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner
has terminated the job for any reason.
1
Switches to Ports configuration.
2
Shows all of the available ports.
Management tools_ 5
maintenance
1.
This chapter provides information about maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adjusting the color contrast
Finding the serial number
Cleaning the machine
Adjusting the color contrast
Storing the toner cartridge
Maintenance parts
Tips for moving & storing your machine
Cleaning the outside
Color menu allows you to adjust the color setting.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Color appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until Custom Color appears and press OK.
6. Press the left/right arrow until the color menu you want to appears on
display and press OK.
You can adjust the contrast of each color independently. Default
optimizes the color contrast automatically. Manual Adjust allows
you to manually adjust the color contrast for each cartridge.
Default setting is recommended for getting best color quality.
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft and lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth
slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the
machine.
Cleaning the inside
During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can accumulate
inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems such as
toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and
reduces these problems.
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to
cool down.
2. Using the handle, completely open the front door.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
If you have moved the machine, it is strongly recommended to operate
this menu manually.
Finding the serial number
When you call for service or register as a user on the Samsung website, the
machine’s serial number by taking the following steps.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Serial Number appears and press OK.
5. Check your machine’s serial number.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove four
cartridges from the machine.
Cleaning the machine
If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty
environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the most
optimum print quality.
•Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent or other strong
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
•If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner,
we recommend that you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water
to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and
might be harmful if inhaled.
Maintenance_ 1
4. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using the handle.
7. Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit, push imaging unit
into the machine.
5. Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of
the imaging unit.
Do not touch the green surface of the drum located in the imaging
unit. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
8. Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make
sure that it is firmly seated in place.
Do not touch the green surface of the drum located in the imaging
unit. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
6. With a dry and lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from
the toner cartridges area and their cavities.
•If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
•If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we
recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to
clean. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows into the air
then might be harmful if inhaled.
9. Slide four toner cartridges back into the machine.
10. Reinstall all the compartments into the machine and close the front door.
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
11. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on.
After cleaning, let the machine to dry completely.
Maintenance_ 2
Cleaning the scan unit
5. Push the ADF sheet with any tool such as tweezers carefully.
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the
day as needed.
The procedure may differ depending on your model. Check your
model name.
The following procedure is for CLX-3185, CLX-3185N and CLX-3185WK.
1. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.
6. Hold the edge of the ADF sheet and wipe both sides of the ADF sheet
until it is clean and dry.
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean
and dry.
5. Close the scanner lid.
The following procedure is for CLX-3185FN and CLX-3185FW.
1. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass until it is clean and dry.
7. Push the ADF sheet back into the machine smoothly.
4
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
Scanner lid
Scanner glass
ADF sheet
White sheet
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean
and dry.
8. Close the scanner lid.
Maintenance_ 3
Storing the toner cartridge
Items
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature
and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to
ensure the optimum performance, highest quality and longest life from your
new Samsung toner cartridge.
Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be
used. This should be in controlled office temperature and humidity
conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original and unopened
package until installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the
top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful
shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is
removed from the printer, follow the instruction below to store the toner
cartridge properly.
• Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package.
• Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if it
was installed in the machine.
• Do not store consumable in any of the following conditions:
-Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
-Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.
-An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
-Direct sunlight or room light.
-Dusty places.
-A car for a long period of time.
-An environment where corrosive gases are present.
-An environment with salty air.
Handling instructions
•
•
•
Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge.
Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this
can cause internal damage and toner spillage.
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of
non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store
brand, refilled or remanufactured toner cartridges.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine
caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured or non-Samsung
brand toner cartridge.
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary
depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, printing interval, media type and/or media size. For example, if
you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may
need to change the cartridge more often.
Yield (Average)
Fuser unit
Approx. 50,000 black pages or 12,500 color pages
Transfer roller
Approx. 50,000 black pages or 12,500 color pages
Transfer unit (ITB)
Approx. 50,000 black pages or 12,500 color pages
Pick-up roller
Approx. 50,000 pages
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized
service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The
warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after
their lifespan.
The battery inside the machine is a service component. Do not
change it by yourself.
There is risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to your local environmental
guidelines. Don’t puncture or incinerate the battery.
Checking replacables
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the
number of pages the machine has printed or scanned. Replace the
corresponding parts, if necessary.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK.
•Supplies Info: Prints the supply information page.
•Total: Displays the total number of pages printed.
•ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages printed by using the ADF.
•Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned by using scanner
glass.
•Imaging Unit, Transfer Belt, Fuser, TransferRoller, Tray1 Roller:
Displays the number of pages printed by each item.
6. If you selected to print a supply information page, press OK to confirm.
7. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
Tips for moving & storing your machine
•
•
When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise,
the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can
cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality.
When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding
the machine securely.
Maintenance parts
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts,
and to maintain your machine in top working condition, the following items
will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages, or when the life
span of each item has expired.
Maintenance_ 4
troubleshooting
1.
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
Redistributing toner
Tips for avoiding paper jams
Clearing original document jams (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
Redistributing toner
•
•
•
Clearing paper jams
Understanding display messages
Solving other problems
3. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life,
• White streaks or light printing occurs.
• Prepare toner appears on the display.
• The Status LED blinks red.
If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing
the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light
printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner.
1. Using the handle, completely open the front door.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
4. Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and
then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge. Insert the cartridge until it
clicks into place.
2. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the
cartridge from the machine.
5. Close the front door. Make sure the door is securely latched.
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not operate.
Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
When a paper jam occurs, refer to the guidelines below: (See "Clearing
paper jams" on page 2).
• Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly (See "Loading
Troubleshooting_ 1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
paper in the tray" on page 4).
Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
Do not mix paper types in a tray.
Use only recommended print media (See "Setting the paper size and
type" on page 6).
Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the
tray.
If you see no paper in this area, go to step 5.
4. Close the document feeder cover. Reload the pages you removed, if
any, in the document feeder.
Clearing original document jams
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW only)
When an original document jams in the document feeder, a warning
message appears on the display.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document slowly
and carefully.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin or
mixed paper-type originals.
5. Open the scanner lid.
6. Seize the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by
carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.
1. Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder.
2. Open the document feeder cover.
1
1 scanner lid
3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder.
7. Close the scanner lid. Load the removed pages back into the document
feeder.
Clearing paper jams
When a paper jam occurs, the warning message appears on the display
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.
Message
Location of Jam
Go to
Paper jam
in Tray 1
In the paper feed area
and inside the machine
See "In the tray" on
page 3.
Paper jam
inside machine
Inside the machine
See "In the fuser unit
area" on page 3.
Paper jam
in exit area
Inside the machine and in
the paper exit area
See "In the paper exit
area" on page 4.
Troubleshooting_ 2
Some messages may not appear on the display depending on options
or models.
1. Open the scan unit first and then inner cover.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and
carefully. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the
jam.
1
In the tray
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
2
1. Open and close the front door. The jammed paper is automatically
ejected from the machine.
If the paper does not eject, go to the next step.
2. Pull out tray 1 out of the machine.
Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could cause
burns! Take care when removing paper from the machine.
1. Holding the inner cover open, carefully take the jammed paper out of the
machine. The inner cover will then close automatically. Lower down the
scan unit gently until it is completely closed. Make sure that it is securely
latched. Printing automatically resumes.
3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
Be careful not to pinch your fingers!
If you do not see the paper, lower down the scan unit gently until it is
completely closed. Go to the next step.
2. To remove the jammed paper, open the rear door.
If the paper does not eject when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge (See "In the
fuser unit area" on page 3).
4. Insert the tray 1 back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing
automatically resumes.
In the fuser unit area
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
If paper is jammed in the fuser unit area, follow the next steps to release the
jammed paper.
Troubleshooting_ 3
3. Carefully remove the paper by pulling in the direction as shown below.
Most of the jammed paper can be removed in this step.
4. If you see the jammed paper, pull it straight up. Skip to step 10.
If you do not see the paper or if there is any resistance when you pull,
stop and go to the next step.
5. Pull up the fuser lever.
4. Close the rear door. Printing automatically resumes.
In the paper exit area
Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam.
1. Open and close the front door. The jammed paper is automatically
ejected from the machine.
2. Gently pull the paper out the output tray.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the
machine.
6. Open the scan unit first and then inner cover.
If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when
you pull, stop and go to the next step.
3. Open the rear door.
1
2
Troubleshooting_ 4
Understanding display messages
7. Carefully take the jammed paper out of the machine.
Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine’s
status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages’ and
their meaning, and correct the problem, if necessary.
Checking display messages
•If a message is not in the table, reboot the power and try the printing
job again. If the problem persists, call a service representative.
•When you call for service, provide the service representative with the
contents of display message.
•Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the
options or models.
•[error number] indicates the error number.
•[tray type] indicates the tray number.
•[media type] indicates the media type.
•[media size] indicates the media size.
•[color] indicates the color of toner or imaging unit.
8. Lower down the scan unit gently and slowly until it completely closed.
Make sure that it is securely latched.
Message
Suggested solutions
[COMM. Error]
The machine has a
communication
problem.
Ask the sender to try
again.
[Incompatible]
The machine has
received a fax from
which is registered as
a junk fax.
The received fax data
will be deleted.
Reconfirm junk fax setup
(See "Changing the fax
setup options" on
page 1).
[Line Busy]
The receiving fax
machine did not
answer or the line is
already engaged.
Try again after a few
minutes.
[Line Error]
Your machine cannot
connect with the
receiving fax machine
or has lost contact
because of a problem
with the phone line.
Try again. If the problem
persists, wait an hour or
so for the line to clear
and try again. Or, Turn
the ECM mode on (See
"Fax setup
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185
FW only)" on page 1).
BOOTP problem
Auto IP Run
The IP address
assignment is failed.
This happens when
Auto IP for BOOTP is
set in SyncThru Web
Service.
Change the IP address
assignment method to
DHCP or Static. If you do
not change this option,
the BOOTP server
continually asks to
assign the IP address.
BOOTP problem
Reconfigure DHCP
The IP address
assignment is failed.
This happens when
Auto IP for BOOTP is
not set in SyncThru
Web Service.
Change the IP address
assignment method to
DHCP or Static. If you do
not change this option,
the BOOTP server
continually asks to
assign the IP address.
Be careful no to pinch your fingers!
9. Pull down the fuser lever.
Meaning
10. Close the rear door. Printing automatically resumes.
Troubleshooting_ 5
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Not Compatible
[color] toner
The toner cartridge is
not suitable for your
machine.
Install the corresponding
toner cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
cartridge (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 2).
Not installed
Waste tank
The waste toner
container is not
installed.
Install the waste toner
container.
Not original
[color] toner
The toner cartridge is
not a
Samsung-genuine
toner cartridge.
Install the corresponding
toner cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
cartridge (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 2).
DHCP problem:
Auto IP Run
The IP address
assignment is failed.
This happens when
Auto IP for DHCP is
set in SyncThru Web
Service.
Change the IP address
assignment method to
BOOTP or Static. If you
do not change this
option, the DHCP server
continually asks to
assign the IP address.
DHCP problem
Reconfigure
BOOTP
The IP address
assignment is failed.
This happens when
Auto IP for DHCP is
not set SyncThru Web
Service.
Change the IP address
assignment method to
BOOTP or Static. If you
do not change this
option, the DHCP server
continually asks to
assign the IP address.
Document Jam.
Remove Jam
The loaded original
document has
jammed in the ADF.
Clear the jam (See
"Clearing original
document jams
(CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185
FW only)" on page 2).
Output bin full
Remove media
The output tray is full.
Or the sensor is not
facing down.
Remove papers from the
output tray, the machine
resumes printing.
Door Open
Close it
The front door is not
securely latched.
Close the door until it
locks into place.
Paper Empty
in Tray1
There is no paper in
tray 1.
Load paper in tray 1 (See
"Loading paper in the
tray" on page 4).
Error [error number]
Call for service
A system error has
occurred.
Turn the power button off
and on. If the problem
persists, call a service
representative.
Paper jam
in exit area
Paper has jammed in
the paper exit area.
Clear the jam (See "In
the paper exit area" on
page 4).
Error [error number]
Turn off then on
A system error has
occurred.
Turn the power button off
and on. If the problem
persists, call a service
representative.
Paper jam
in Tray 1
Paper has jammed in
the Tray 1 area.
Clear the jam (See "In
the tray" on page 3).
Paper jam
inside machine
Paper has jammed
inside the machine.
Clear the jam (See "In
the fuser unit area" on
page 3).
Prepare IMG unit
▼
The estimated life of
imaging unit is close.
Prepare a imaging unit
for replacement (See
"Available supplies" on
page 1).
Prepare new
Transfer belt
The estimated life of
transfer unit (ITB) is
close.
The estimated life of a
transfer unit (ITB) is
close (See "Available
maintenance parts" on
page 1).
Remove seal tape
& Install Toner
The machine cannot
detect a toner
cartridge.
Remove the sealing tape
from the toner cartridge.
Refer to the Quick
Installation Guide.
Replace new
Transfer belt
The transfer unit (ITB)
has almost reached its
estimated life.
Prepare the transfer unit
(ITB) with a new one
(See "Available
maintenance parts" on
page 1).
Replace new
Transfer roller
The transfer roller has
almost reached its
estimated life.
Replace the transfer
roller with a new one
(See "Available
maintenance parts" on
page 1).
Install Toner
▼
Memory Full
Remove Job
The toner cartridge is
installed improperly or
not installed.
The memory is full.
Reinstall the toner
cartridge two or three
times to confirm it is
seated properly. If the
problem persists, the
toner cartridge is not
being detected. Contact
the service
representatives.
Press the left/right arrow
to highlight Cancel or
Start, then press OK. If
you select Cancel, the
machine stops the fax
job. If you select Start,
the machine only sends
scanned documents of
the fax job.
Network Problem:
IP Conflict
The IP address is
used elsewhere.
Check the IP address or
obtain a new IP address.
No Answer
The receiving fax
machine has not
answered after
several redial
attempts.
Try again. Make sure
that the receiving
machine is operational.
Troubleshooting_ 6
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Prepare toner
▼
Small amount of toner
is left in the indicated
cartridge. The
estimated cartridge
life of toner is close.
Prepare a new cartridge
for a replacement. You
may temporarily increase
the printing quality by
redistributing the toner
(See "Redistributing
toner" on page 1).
Replace
Fuser soon
The estimated life of
fuser unit is close.
Prepare a fuser unit for
replacement (See
"Available maintenance
parts" on page 1).
Message
Replace Toner
▼
Meaning
The indicated toner
cartridge has almost
reached its estimated
cartridge life. The
machine might stop
printing.
Suggested solutions
•
Estimated
cartridge life
means the
expected or
estimated toner
cartridge life,
which indicates
the average
capacity of
print-outs and is
designed
pursuant to
ISO/IEC 19798.
If Stop or Continue
appears in the LCD
display, choose one of
them. If you select
Stop, the machine
stops printing and you
cannot print anymore
without changing the
cartridge. If you select
Continue, the
machine keeps
printing but the
printing quality cannot
be guaranteed.
Replace the toner
cartridge for the best
print quality when this
message appears.
Using a cartridge
beyond this stage can
result in printing
quality issues (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 2).
Samsung does not
recommend using
non-genuine
Samsung toner
cartridge such as
refilled or
remanufactured.
Samsung cannot
guarantee
non-genuine
Samsung toner
cartridge's quality.
Service or repair
required as a result
of using
non-genuine
Samsung toner
cartridges will not be
covered under the
machine warranty.
•
If the machine stops
printing, replace the
toner cartridge (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 2).
Replace new
Fuser unit
The fuser unit has
almost reached its
estimated life.
Replace the fuser unit
with a new one (See
"Available maintenance
parts" on page 1).
Replace IMG unit
▼
The imaging unit has
almost reached its
estimated life.
Replace the imaging unit
with a new one (See
"Replacing the imaging
unit" on page 3).
Troubleshooting_ 7
Message
Meaning
Suggested solutions
Self Diagnostics
Please wait
The engine in your
printer is checking
some problems
detected.
Please wait a few
minutes.
Toner Supply Err.
▼
The machine cannot
detect a toner
cartridge.
Remove the toner
hopper sheet from the
toner cartridge (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 2). Or
open and close the front
door. If the problem
persists, turn the power
button off and on.
Too many Faxes
Remove Job
Too many faxes are
received.
Remove received faxes.
Solving other problems
The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is
corrected. If the problem persists, contact a service representative.
Other problems include:
• See "Power problems" on page 8.
• See "Paper feeding problems" on page 9.
• See "Printing problems" on page 10.
• See "Printing quality problems" on page 11.
• See "Copying problems" on page 14.
• See "Scanning problems" on page 14.
• See "Fax problems" on page 15.
• See "Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem" on page 15.
• See "Common Windows problems" on page 15.
• See "Common Linux problems" on page 16.
• See "Common Macintosh problems" on page 17.
Power problems
Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems.
Troubleshooting_ 8
Condition
The machine is
not receiving
power,
or the connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is not
connected
properly.
Condition
Suggested solutions
•
Plug in the power cord and press
the control panel.
(power) on
Paper sticks
together.
Suggested solutions
•
•
•
•
•
Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it.
-For Local Printing
Multiple sheets of
paper do not feed.
Different types of paper may be stacked in the
tray. Load paper of only one type, size and
weight.
Paper does not feed
into the machine.
•
•
•
•
The paper keeps
jamming.
•
•
•
-For Network Printing
(CLX-3185N/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW
only)
Envelopes skew or
fail to feed correctly.
Paper feeding problems
Condition
Paper jams during
printing.
Ensure there is not too much paper in the
tray. The tray can hold up to 130 sheets of
paper, depending on the thickness of your
paper.
Make sure that you are using the correct type
of paper (See "Setting the paper size and
type" on page 6).
Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan
the paper.
Humid conditions may cause some paper to
stick together, replace with a new stack.
Suggested solutions
Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams"
on page 2).
Troubleshooting_ 9
Remove any obstructions from inside the
machine.
Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray.
The paper is too thick. Use only paper that
meets the specifications required by the
machine (See "Selecting print media" on
page 2).
There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray.
An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use
only paper that meets the specifications
required by the machine (See "Selecting print
media" on page 2).
There may be debris inside the machine.
Open the front door and remove any debris.
Ensure that the paper guides are against both
sides of the envelopes.
Printing problems
Condition
The machine
does not print.
Possible cause
Condition
Suggested solutions
The machine is not
receiving power.
Check the power cord
connections. Check the
power switch and the power
source.
The machine is not
selected as the
default machine.
Select your machine as your
default machine in your
Windows.
Check the machine for the following.
• The front door or rear door is not closed. Close
the door.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (See
"Clearing paper jams" on page 2).
• No paper is loaded. Load paper (See "Loading
paper in the tray" on page 4).
• The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the
toner cartridge.
If a system error occurs, contact a service
representative.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the machine
cable and reconnect it.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is
defective.
If possible, attach the cable to
another computer that is
working properly and print a
job. You can also try using a
different machine cable.
The port setting is
incorrect.
Check the Windows printer
setting to make sure that the
print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has
more than one port, make
sure that the machine is
attached to the correct one.
The machine may
be configured
incorrectly.
Check the Printing
Preferences to ensure that
all of the print settings are
correct (See "Opening
printing preferences" on
page 2).
The printer driver
may be incorrectly
installed.
Repair the machine software
(See "Installing USB
connected machine’s driver"
on page 3).
The machine is
malfunctioning.
Check the display message
on the control panel to see if
the machine is indicating a
system error. If the error
cannot be cleared, contact a
service representative.
The machine
does not print.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The document size
is so big that the
hard disk space of
the computer is not
enough to access
the print job.
Allocate more hard disk
space on your computer for
spooling, and try printing.
The output tray is
full.
It can hold up to 80 ( 80 g/m2)
sheets of plain paper. Once
the paper is removed from
the output tray, the machine
resumes printing.
If the machine is
used for a long time
continuously, the
printing speed could
be slowed down, or
the machine could
pause to cool down.
Wait for the machine to cool
down. Printing automatically
resumes after the machine is
cooled down.
The machine
selects print
materials from
the wrong paper
source.
The paper source
selection in the
printer properties
may be incorrect.
For many software
applications, the paper
source selection is found
under the Paper tab within
the printer properties. Select
the correct paper source. See
the printer driver help screen.
A print job is
extremely slow.
The job may be very
complex.
Reduce the complexity of the
page or try adjusting the print
quality settings.
Half the page is
blank.
The page
orientation setting
may be incorrect.
Change the page orientation
in your application. See the
printer driver help screen.
The paper size and
the paper size
settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in
the printer driver settings
matches the paper in the tray.
Or, ensure that the paper size
in the printer driver settings
matches the paper selection
in the software application
settings you use.
Troubleshooting_ 10
Condition
The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled or
incomplete.
Pages print, but
they are blank.
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The machine cable
is loose or
defective.
Disconnect the machine
cable and reconnect. Try a
print job that you have
already printed successfully.
If possible, attach the cable
and the machine to another
computer and try a print job
that you know works. Finally,
try a new printer cable.
The wrong printer
driver was selected.
Check the application’s
printer selection menu to
ensure that your machine is
selected.
The software
application is
malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from
another application.
The operating
system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the
computer. Turn the machine
off and back on again.
The toner cartridge
is defective or out of
toner.
Redistribute the toner, if
necessary (See
"Redistributing toner" on
page 1).
If necessary, replace the
toner cartridge (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 2).
The file may have
blank pages.
Check the file to ensure that it
does not contain blank
pages.
Some parts such as
the controller or the
board may be
defective.
Contact a service
representative.
The machine
does not print
PDF file
correctly. Some
graphics, text or
illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility
between the PDF
file and the Acrobat
products
Printing the PDF file as an
image may solve this
problem. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat
printing options.
The print quality
of photos is not
good. Images
are not clear.
The resolution of
the photo is very
low.
Reduce the photo size. If you
increase the photo size in the
software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
Before printing,
the machine
emits vapor near
the output tray.
Using damp paper
can cause vapor
during printing.
This is not a problem. Just
keep printing.
Condition
Possible cause
Suggested solutions
The printed
paper is curled.
Paper curl occurs
due to many
different factors
such as
temperature,
humidity, paper
type, high coverage
printing, etc.
Use the Paper Curl
Reduction option. Go to
Printing Preferences (See
"Opening printing
preferences" on page 2), click
Advanced tab, and click the
Paper Curl Reduction check
box. This option will optimize
environmental factors to
reduce the paper curl level.
The printed
billing paper is
curled.
The paper type
setting does not
match.
Change the printer option and
try again. Go to Printing
Preferences, click Paper
tab, and set type to Thick
(See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 2).
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the
problem.
Condition
Suggested Solutions
Light or faded print
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on
the page:
• The toner supply is low. You may be able to
temporarily extend the toner cartridge life (See
"Redistributing toner" on page 1). If this does
not improve the print quality, install a new
toner cartridge.
• The paper may not meet paper specification;
for example, the paper may be too moist or
rough (See "Selecting print media" on page 2).
• If the entire page is light, the print resolution
setting is too low or the toner save mode is on.
Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner
save mode off. See the help screen of the
printer driver.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs
cleaning.
• The surface of the Laser Scanning Unit (LSU)
part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean
the LSU, contact a service representative.
The top half of the
paper is printed
lighter than the
rest of the paper
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of
paper.
• Change the printer option and try again.
Go to the Printing Preferences, click the
Paper tab, and set the paper type to
Recycled.
It will take longer to
print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
Troubleshooting_ 11
Condition
Toner specks
Suggested Solutions
•
•
Dropouts
The paper may not meet specification, for
example, the paper may be too moist or rough
(See "Selecting print media" on page 2).
The paper path may need cleaning (See
"Cleaning the inside" on page 1).
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly
on the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try
reprinting the job.
• The moisture content of the paper is uneven
or the paper has moist spots on its surface.
Try a different brand of paper (See "Selecting
print media" on page 2).
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing
processes can cause some areas to reject
toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to
Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and
set type to Thick (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 2).
If these steps do not correct the problem, contact
a service representative.
White Spots
If white spots appear on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a
paper falls to the inner devices within the
machine, which means the transfer belt may
be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine.
Contact a service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a
service representative.
Vertical lines
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The drum inside the toner cartridge has
probably been scratched. Remove the toner
cartridge and install a new one (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 2).
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU, contact
a service representative.
Condition
Suggested Solutions
Black background
If the amount of background shading becomes
unacceptable:
• Change to a lighter weight paper (See
"Selecting print media" on page 2).
• Check the environmental conditions: very dry
(low humidity) or high humidity (higher than
80% RH) conditions can increase the amount
of background shading.
• Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a
new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 2).
Toner smear
•
•
•
Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning
the inside" on page 1).
Check the paper type and quality (See
"Selecting print media" on page 2).
Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a
new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge"
on page 2).
Vertical repetitive
defects
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of
the page at even intervals:
• The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a
repetitive mark occurs on the page, print a
cleaning sheet several times to clean the
cartridge. After the printout, if you still have the
same problems, remove the toner cartridge
and install a new one (See "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 2).
• Parts of the machine may have toner on them.
If the defects occur on the back of the page,
the problem will likely correct itself after a few
more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged.
Contact a service representative.
Background
scatter
Background scatter results from bits of toner
randomly distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing with
a fresh ream of paper. Do not open packages
of paper until necessary so that the paper
does not absorb too much moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an envelope,
change the printing layout to avoid printing
over areas that have overlapping seams on
the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause
problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire surface
area of a printed page, adjust the print
resolution through your software application or
the printer properties.
A
Troubleshooting_ 12
Condition
Suggested Solutions
Toner particles are
around bold
characters or
pictures
The toner might not adhere properly to this type of
paper.
• Change the printer option and try again.
Go to the Printing Preferences, click the
Paper tab, and set the paper type to
Recycled.
Misformed
characters
•
•
Page skew
A aBb
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C c
Cc
Curl or wave
•
•
•
If characters are improperly formed and
producing hollow images, the paper stock may
be too slick. Try different paper (See "Selecting
print media" on page 2).
If characters are improperly formed and
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit may
need service, For service, contact a service
representative.
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality (See
"Selecting print media" on page 2).
Ensure that the paper or other material is
loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight
or too loose against the paper stack.
Suggested Solutions
Back of printouts
are dirty
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the
machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 1).
Solid Color or
Black pages
•
•
A
Loose toner
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wrinkles or
creases
Condition
•
•
•
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality. Both high
temperature and humidity can cause paper curl
(See "Selecting print media" on page 2).
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
Check the paper type and quality (See
"Selecting print media" on page 2).
Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Character Voids
A
Horizontal stripes
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
A aBb C
Troubleshooting_ 13
The toner cartridge may not be installed
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it.
The toner cartridge may be defective and need
replacing. Remove the toner cartridge and
install a new one (See "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 2).
The machine may require repair. Contact a
service representative.
Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning
the inside" on page 1).
Check the paper type and quality (See
"Selecting print media" on page 2).
Remove the toner cartridge and install a new
one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 2).
If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Character voids are white areas within parts of
characters that should be solid black.
• If you are using transparencies, try another
type of transparency. Because of the
composition of transparencies, some
character voids are normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface of
the paper. Remove the paper and turn it over.
• The paper may not meet paper specifications
(See "Selecting print media" on page 2).
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears
appear:
• The toner cartridge may be installed
improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert
it.
• The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove
the toner cartridge and install a new one (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 2).
• If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Condition
Curl
Suggested Solutions
Condition
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not
feed into the machine:
• Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go to
printer properties, click Paper tab and set type
to Thin Paper (See "Opening printing
preferences" on page 2).
Toner cartridge
produces fewer
copies than
expected before
running out of toner.
Suggested solution
•
Your originals may contain pictures, solids, or
heavy lines. For example, your originals may
be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
The scanner lid may be left open while copies
are being made.
Turn the machine off and back on.
•
•
Scanning problems
An unknown image
repetitively
appears on a few
sheets or loose
toner, light print, or
contamination
occurs.
Your machine is probably being used at an
altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft.) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality such
as loose toner or light imaging. You can select a
correct altitude of your machine location (See
"Altitude adjustment" on page 1).
Condition
The scanner does not
work.
•
Suggested solution
•
Copies are too light
or too dark.
Use Darkness in Copy feature to lighten or
darken the backgrounds of copies (See
"Changing the settings for each copy" on
page 1).
Smears, lines,
marks, or spots
appear on copies.
•
•
Copy image is
skewed.
•
•
If the defects are on the original, use
Darkness in Copy feature to lighten the
background of your copies (See "Changing
the settings for each copy" on page 1).
If there are no defects on the original, clean
the scan unit (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on
page 3).
Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass.
Image rubs off the
copy easily.
•
Frequent copy paper
jams occur.
•
•
•
•
The unit scans very
slowly.
Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass.
Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly.
Blank copies print
out.
•
•
•
Copying problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
Replace the paper in the tray with paper from
a new package.
In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in
the machine for extended periods of time.
Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in the
tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh
supply. Check/adjust the paper guides, if
necessary.
Ensure that the paper is the proper paper
weight.
Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper
remaining in the machine after a paper jam
has been cleared.
Troubleshooting_ 14
•
•
•
Make sure that you place the original to be
scanned face down on the scanner glass.
There may not be enough available memory
to hold the document you want to scan. Try
the Prescan function to see if that works.
Try lowering the scan resolution rate.
Check that the machine cable is connected
properly.
Make sure that the machine cable is not
defective. Switch the cable with a known
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
Check that the scanner is configured
correctly. Check scan setting in the
SmarThru or the application you want to use
to make certain that the scanner job is being
sent to the correct port (for example,
USB001).
Check if the machine is printing received
data. If so, scan the document after the
received data has been printed.
Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
Communication speed slows in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory
required to analyze and reproduce the
scanned image. Set your computer to the
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It
will help to increase the speed. For details
about how to set BIOS, refer to your
computer user’s guide.
Condition
Suggested solutions
Message appears on
your computer
screen:
• Device can’t be
set to the H/W
mode you want.
• Port is being used
by another
program.
• Port is Disabled.
• Scanner is busy
receiving or
printing data.
When the current
job is completed,
try again.
• Invalid handle.
• Scanning has
failed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
condition
There may be a copying or printing job in
progress. Try your job again when that job is
finished.
The selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
The machine cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
The scanner driver is not installed or the
operating environment is not set up properly.
Ensure that the machine is properly
connected and the power is on, then restart
your computer.
The USB cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
Fax problems
condition
suggested solutions
The machine is not
working, there is no
display, or the
buttons are not
working.
•
•
No dial tone.
•
•
Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
Ensure that there is power being supplied to
the electrical outlet.
Check that the phone line is properly
connected.
Check that the phone socket on the wall is
working by plugging in another phone.
The numbers stored
in memory do not
dial correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in
memory correctly. Print an Address Book list
(See "Setting up Address Book" on page 6).
The original does
not feed into the
machine.
•
•
•
Faxes are not
received
automatically.
The machine does
not send.
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that the
original is the right size, not too thick or thin.
Make sure that the document feeder is firmly
closed.
The document feeder rubber pad may need to
be replaced. Contact a service
representative.
The receiving mode should be set to fax.
Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
Check to see if the display shows any error
message. If it does, clear the problem.
Make sure that the original is loaded in the
document feeder or on the scanner glass.
Check the fax machine you are sending to, to
see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax
has blank spaces or
is of poor-quality.
suggested solutions
•
•
•
•
The fax machine sending you the fax may be
faulty.
A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
Check your machine by making a copy.
A toner cartridge has reached its estimated
cartridge life. Replace the toner cartridge
(See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 2).
Some of the words
on an incoming fax
are stretched.
The fax machine sending the fax had a
temporary document jam.
There are lines on
the originals you
sent.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it (See
"Cleaning the scan unit" on page 3).
The machine dials a
number, but the
connection with the
other fax machine
fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out of
paper, or cannot answer incoming calls. Speak
with the other machine operator and ask her/him
to solve out the problem.
Faxes do not store in
memory.
There may not be enough memory space to
store the fax. If the display indicating the
memory status shows, delete any faxes you no
longer need from the memory, and then try to
store the fax again. Call a service
representative.
Blank areas appear
at the bottom of
each page or on
other pages, with a
small strip of text at
the top
You may have chosen the wrong paper settings
in the user option setting. For details about
paper settings, see "Setting the paper size and
type" on page 6.
Samsung Scan and Fax Manager Problem
Condition
suggested solution
Samsung Scan and
Fax Manager does
not work.
Check your system requirements. Samsung
Scan and Fax Manager works in Windows and
Mac OS (See "System requirements" on page 2).
Common Windows problems
Condition
Suggested solutions
“File in Use”
message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all
software from the printer’s startup group, then
restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection
Fault”, “Exception
OE”, “Spool 32” or
“Illegal Operation”
messages appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows
and try printing again.
Troubleshooting_ 15
Condition
“Fail To Print”, “A
printer timeout error
occurred” messages
appear.
Common Linux problems
Suggested solutions
These messages may appear during printing.
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes
printing. If the message appears in standby
mode or after printing has been completed,
check the connection and/or whether an error
has occurred.
condition
The machine does
not print.
Suggested solutions
•
Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your
computer for further information on Windows error messages.
•
•
•
•
The machine does
not print whole
pages, and output is
printed on half the
page.
Troubleshooting_ 16
Check if the printer driver is installed in your
system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and
switch to the Printers tab in Printers
configuration window to look at the list of
available machines. Make sure that your
machine is displayed on the list. If not, open
Add new printer wizard to set up your
device.
Check if the machine is started. Open
Printers configuration and select your
machine on the printers list. Look at the
description in the Selected printer pane. If its
status contains Stopped string, press the
Start button. After that normal operation of
the machine should be restored. The
“stopped” status might be activated when
some problems in printing occurred. For
instance, this could be an attempt to print a
document when the port is claimed by a
scanning application.
Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional
components of machine (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
user applications to the same port is possible.
To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them
at a time is allowed to gain control over the
device. The other user will encounter “device
busy” response. You should open ports
configuration and select the port assigned to
your machine. In the Selected port pane you
can see if the port is occupied by some other
application. If this is the case, you should
either wait for completion of the current job or
press the Release port button, if you are sure
that the present application is not functioning
properly.
Check if your application has special print
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified
in the command line parameter, then remove
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command
line parameter in the command item.
The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet
Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket
printing instead of ipp or install a later version
of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).
It is a known problem that occurs when a color
machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been
reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript
Bug 688252.The problem is solved in AFPL
Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the
latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from
http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and
install it to solve this problem.
condition
I cannot scan via
Gimp Front-end.
I encounter the
“Cannot open port
device file” error
when printing a
document.
The machine does
not appear on the
scanners list.
Suggested solutions
condition
Check if Gimp Front-end has Xsane: Device
dialog on the Acquire menu. If not, you should
install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the your
computer. You can find Xsane plug-in package
for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home
page. For the detailed information, refer to the
Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front-end
application.
If you wish to use another kind of scan
application, refer to application’s Help.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR
GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress.
Known versions of CUPS server break the print
job whenever print options are changed and
then try to restart the job from the beginning.
Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while
printing, the abrupt termination of the driver
keeps the port locked and unavailable for
subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try
to release the port by selecting Release port in
Port configuration window.
•
•
•
Ensure your machine is attached to your
computer, connected properly via the USB
port, and is turned on.
Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is
installed in your system. Open Unified Linux
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Make
sure that driver with a name corresponding to
your machine's name is listed in the window.
Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional
components of machine (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
user applications to the same port is possible.
To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them
at a time is allowed to gain control over the
device. The other user will encounter “device
busy” response. This usually happens when
starting a scan procedure. An appropriate
message box appears.
To identify the source of the problem, open
the Ports configuration and select the port
assigned to your scanner, port's symbol
/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1, and so on. USB ports start at
/dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to
/dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth
sequentially. In the Selected port pane, you
can see if the port is occupied by another
application. If this is the case, you should
either wait for completion of the current job or
press the Release port button, if you are sure
that the present port application is not
functioning properly.
The machine does
not scan.
Suggested solutions
•
•
Ensure a document is loaded into the
machine, ensure your machine is connected
to the computer.
If there is an I/O error while scanning.
Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for
further information on Linux error messages.
Common Macintosh problems
condition
Suggested solutions
The machine does
not print PDF files
correctly. Some
parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations
are missing.
Printing the PDF file as an image may enable
the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the
Acrobat printing options.
The document has
printed, but the print
job has not
disappeared from
the spooler in Mac
OS X 10.3.2.
Update your Mac OS to Mac OS X 10.3.3. or
higher.
Some letters are not
displayed normally
during the cover
page printing.
Mac OS cannot create the font during the cover
page printing. The English alphabet and
numbers are displayed normally on the cover
page.
When printing a
document in Mac OS
with Acrobat
Reader 6.0 or higher,
colors print
incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in your
machine driver matches the one in Acrobat
Reader.
It will take longer to print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
Refer to the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for
further information on Macintosh error messages.
Troubleshooting_ 17
supplies and accessories
1.
This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies, accessories and maintenance parts available for your
machine.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
How to purchase
Available supplies
Available maintenance parts
Checking replaceable’s lifespan
•Illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models. Check your model name.
•Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact
your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies
and maintenance parts.
To order Samsung-authorized supplies, accessories and maintenance
parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you
purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies,
and then select your country/region to obtain the information on calling for
service.
Available supplies
Average yielda
•
•
Average
continuous black
cartridge yield:
1,500 standard
pages (Black)
Average
continuous color
cartridge yield:
1,000 standard
pages
(Yellow/Magenta/C
yan)
c. Region B: Bangladesh, China, India, Nepal, Vietnam.
When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies, these must
be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using.
Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible
with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges
and other supplies according to the specific country conditions.
Available maintenance parts
When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of
supplies for your machine.
Standard yield
toner cartridge
b. Region A: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus,
Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,
Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Netherlands, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, UK.
d. Image counts based on one color on each page. If you print documents
in full color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black), the life of this item will be
reduced by 25%.
How to purchase
Type
Replacing the toner cartridge
Replacing the imaging unit
Replacing the waste toner container
Part name
K407(CLT-K407S): Black
C407(CLT-C407S): Cyan
M407(CLT-M407S): Magenta
Y407(CLT-Y407S): Yellow
Region Ab
K4072(CLT-K4072S): Black
C4072(CLT-C4072S): Cyan
M4072(CLT-M4072S): Magenta
Y4072(CLT-Y4072S): Yellow
Region Bc
K4073(CLT-K4073S): Black
C4073(CLT-C4073S): Cyan
M4073(CLT-M4073S): Magenta
Y4073(CLT-Y4073S): Yellow
Imaging unit
Approx. 24,000
imagesd
CLT-R407
Waste toner
container
Approx. 10,000
imagesd (Full color
5% image)
CLT-W409
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts
and to maintain your machine in top working condition, the following parts
will need to be replaced after printing the specified number of pages or
when the life span of each item has expired.
Items
Average yielda
Fuser unit
Approx. 50,000 black pages or 12,500 color pages
Transfer roller
Approx. 50,000 black pages or 12,500 color pages
Transfer unit (ITB)
Approx. 50,000 black pages or 12,500 color pages
Pick-up roller
Approx. 50,000 pages
a. Yield is affected by operating system used, computing performance,
application software, connecting method, media type, media size and
job complexity.
To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you purchased
the machine.
Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized
service provider, dealer or the retailer where you purchased the
machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any
maintenance parts after their lifespan.
a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
Supplies and accessories_ 1
Checking replaceable’s lifespan
3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the
cartridge from the machine.
If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems, check the
number of pages the machine has printed. Replace the corresponding
parts, if necessary.
1. Press Menu on the control panel.
2. Press the left/right arrow until System Setup appears and press OK.
3. Press the left/right arrow until Maintenance appears and press OK.
4. Press the left/right arrow until Supplies Life appears and press OK.
5. Press the left/right arrow until the item you want appears and press OK.
•Supplies Info: Prints the supply information page.
•Total: Displays the total number of pages printed in color mode or black
and white mode.
•ADF Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the ADF.
•Platen Scan: Displays the number of pages scanned using the scanner
glass.
•Imaging Unit: Displays the number of pages scanned and printed.
•Transfer Belt: Displays the number of pages scanned and printed.
•Fuser: Displays the number of pages scanned and printed.
•TransferRoller: Displays the number of pages scanned and printed.
•Tray 1 Roller: Displays the number of pages scanned and printed.
6. Press Stop/Clear to return to ready mode.
4. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package.
Don’t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the
toner cartridge package. You could damage the surface of the
toner cartridge.
5. Pull out the hopper sheet from a new toner cartridge.
Replacing the toner cartridge
The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each
one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K).
The status LED and the toner-related message on the display indicate
which toner cartridge should be replaced.
At this stage, the indicated toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Before
replacing the toner cartridge, check the model number for the toner
cartridge used in your machine.
Click this link to open an animation about replacing the toner cartridge.
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.
2. Using the handle, completely open the front door.
6. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side
to side to evenly distribute the toner.
7. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface as shown below and remove
the protecting cap.
Supplies and accessories_ 2
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it
in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
3. Grasp the handles on the front cartridge and pull to remove four
cartridges from the machine.
8. Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and
then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge. Insert the cartridge until it
clicks into place.
4. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle.
9. Close the front door. Make sure the door is securely latched and then
turn the machine on.
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate.
Replacing the imaging unit
When the life span of the imaging unit has expired, the Smart Panel
program window appears on the computer, indicating the imaging unit
needs to be placed. Otherwise, your machine may stop printing.
1. If the machine is printing from the computer or warming up, wait until the
job ends. Then, turn the machine off.
2. Using the handle, completely open the front door.
5. Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of
the imaging unit.
6. Take a new imaging unit out of its package. Remove the protective
devices on both sides of the imaging unit and the paper protecting the
surface of the imaging unit.
•Don’t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the
imaging unit package.
•Do not touch the drum located in the imaging unit. Use the handle
on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
•Be careful not to scratch the surface of imaging unit.
•To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit to light for
more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to
protect it if necessary.
Supplies and accessories_ 3
7. Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit, push imaging unit in
to the machine.
Replacing the waste toner container
When the life span of the waste toner container has expired, the Smart
Panel program window appears on the computer, indicating the waste toner
container needs to be replaced. Otherwise your machine stops printing.
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool.
2. Using the handle, completely open the front door.
8. Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make
sure that it is firmly seated in place.
3. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle.
9. Slide four toner cartridges back into the machine.
Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface
so that the toner does not spill.
4. Remove the container’s cap from the container as shown below and
then use it to close the waste toner container opening.
2
10. Close the front door firmly.
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate. Please, make sure all toner cartridges are installed
properly. If any toner cartridge is installed improperly, the front
door do not close.
1
11. Turn the machine on.
•It may takes few minutes for your machine to get ready.
•If the machine cannot recognize the status of toner cartridges,
open and close the front door. If the problem persists, turn the
power button off and on.
Do not tilt or turn over the container.
5. Take a new waste toner container out of its package.
Supplies and accessories_ 4
6. Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that
it is firmly seated in place.
7. Close the front door firmly.
If the front door is not completely closed, the machine will not
operate. Please, make sure all toner cartridges are installed
properly. If any toner cartridge is installed improperly, the front
door do not close.
8. Turn the machine on.
Supplies and accessories_ 5
specifications
1.
This chapter covers the machine’s primary specifications.
This chapter includes:
•
•
•
•
Hardware specifications
Environmental specifications
Electrical specifications
Print media specifications
The specification values are listed below: specifications are subject to change without notice. See www.samsung.com/printer for possible changes in
information.
Hardware specifications
Item
Dimensions
Weight
Description
Height
•
•
CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK: 310 mm (12.2 inches)
CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW: 344 mm (13.5 inches)
Depth
•
•
CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK: 378 mm (14.9 inches)
CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW: 378 mm (14.9 inches)
Width
•
•
CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK: 416 mm (16.4 inches)
CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW: 416 mm (16.4 inches)
Machine with consumables
•
•
CLX-3185/CLX-3185N/CLX-3185WK: 14.24 Kg (31.39 lbs)
CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW: 15.25 Kg (33.62 lbs)
Environmental specifications
Item
Noise Levela
Description
Printing mode
Less than 46 dBA (Color printing)
Less than 48 dBA (Mono printing)
Copying mode
•
•
Temperature
Humidity
Mono copying
-ADF: 52 dBA
-Scan glass: 50 dBA
Color copying
-ADF: 50 dBA
-Scan glass: 48 dBA
Standby mode
Background noise Level
Sleep mode
Background noise Level
Operation
10 to 32 °C (50 to 89.6 °F)
Storage (packed)
0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F)
Operation
20 to 80% RH
Storage (packed)
10 to 90% RH
a. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.
Specifications_ 1
Electrical specifications
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and
void the product warranty.
Item
Power ratinga
Power consumption
Description
110 volt models
AC 110 - 127 V
220 volt models
AC 220 - 240 V
Average operating mode
Less than 350 W
Ready mode
Less than 60 W
Power save mode
•
•
Power off mode
Less than 0.45 W
CLX-3185/CLX-3185N: Less than 8 W
CLX-3185WK/CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW: Less than 11 W
a. See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage (V), frequency (hertz) and type of current (A) for your machine.
Specifications_ 2
Print media specifications
Type
Plain paper
Size
Weighta
Dimensions
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.50 x 11.00 inches)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.00 inches)
US Folio
216 x 330 mm (8.50 x 13.00 inches)
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio
216 x 343 mm (8.50 x 13.50 inches)
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches)
ISO B5
176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive
184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.50 inches)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.26 inches)
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)
Envelope Monarch
98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.50 inches)
Envelope 6 3/4
92 x 165 mm (3.62 x 6.50 inches)
Envelope No. 10
105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.50 inches)
Envelope No. 9
98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)
Envelope DL
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5
162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches)
Envelope C6
114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches)
Thick paper
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Thin paper
Capacityb
70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond)
130 sheets of 80 g/m2 (21 lbs
bond) paper for the tray
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond)
5 sheets for manual feeding in
the tray
Refer to the Plain paper section.
90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond)
5 sheets for manual feeding in
the tray
Refer to the Plain
paper section
Refer to the Plain paper section.
60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond)
Labelsc
Letter, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section.
120 to 150 g/m2 (37 to 40 lbs bond)
Card stock
Post card
101.60 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 inches)
105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lbs bond)
Transparencyde
Letter, A4
Refer to the Plain paper section.
-
Glossy photof
Letter, A4, Postcard 4
x6
Refer to the Plain paper section.
111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond)
Matte photof
Letter, A4, Postcard 4
x6
Refer to the Pain paper section.
111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond)
Minimum size (custom)
76 x 152.4 mm (3 x 6 inches)
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond)
Maximum size (custom)
216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.02 inches)
Envelope
1 sheet for manual feeding in the
tray
a. If media weight is over 120 g/m2 (32 lbs), load a paper into the tray one by one.
b. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
c. The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness.
d. Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printers by Xerox 3R91331 (A4) or Xerox 3R2780 (Letter).
e. Recommended media: 0.104 to 0.124 mm (0.004094 to 0.004882 inches) thickness of transparency paper.
f. Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A). Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Laser
Professional paper 130 glossy (Product: Q2552A), HP Professional paper 150 glossy (Product: CG965A) and HP Professional Laser paper 120 soft
glossy (Product: Q6542A). Matte paper (A4) for this machine by HP Photo Laser Paper 220 matt (Product: Q6550A).
Specifications_ 3
contact samsung worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.
Country/Regio
n
Customer Care Center
Web Site
Country/Regio
n
Customer Care Center
Web Site
GERMANY
01805 - SAMSUNG
(726-7864 € 0,14/min)
GEORGIA
8-800-555-555
GUATEMALA
1-800-299-0013
www.samsung.com
HONDURAS
800-7919267
www.samsung.com
HONG KONG
(852) 3698-4698
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
HUNGARY
06-80-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
INDIA
3030 8282
1800 110011
1800 3000 8282
1800 266 8282
www.samsung.com
INDONESIA
0800-112-8888
021-5699-7777
www.samsung.com
ITALIA
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com
JAMAICA
1-800-234-7267
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
JAPAN
0120-327-527
www.samsung.com
400-810-5858
010-6475 1880
www.samsung.com
JORDAN
800-22273
KSA
9200-21230
www.samsung.com
COLOMBIA
01-8000112112
www.samsung.com
LATVIA
8000-7267
www.samsung.com
COSTA RICA
0-800-507-7267
www.samsung.com
LITHUANIA
8-800-77777
www.samsung.com
CZECH
REPUBLIC
800-SAMSUNG
(800-726786)
www.samsung.com
LUXEMBURG
261 03 710
www.samsung.com
MALAYSIA
1800-88-9999
www.samsung.com
MEXICO
01-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
MOLDOVA
00-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
NETHERLANDS
0900-SAMSUNG
(0900-7267864) (€
0,10/min)
www.samsung.com
NEW ZEALAND
0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726
786)
www.samsung.com
NICARAGUA
00-1800-5077267
www.samsung.com
NORWAY
815-56 480
www.samsung.com
PANAMA
800-7267
www.samsung.com
ARGENTINE
0800-333-3733
www.samsung.com
ARMENIA
0-800-05-555
AUSTRALIA
1300 362 603
www.samsung.com
AUSTRIA
0810-SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min)
www.samsung.com
AZERBAIJAN
088-55-55-555
BAHRAIN
8000-4726
BELARUS
810-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
BELGIUM
02-201-24-18
www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr
(French)
BRAZIL
0800-124-421
4004-0000
www.samsung.com
CANADA
1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
CHILE
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
CHINA
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DENMARK
70 70 19 70
www.samsung.com
ECUADOR
1-800-10-7267
www.samsung.com
EGYPT
0800-726786
EIRE
0818 717100
www.samsung.com
EL SALVADOR
800-6225
www.samsung.com
ESTONIA
800-7267
www.samsung.com
KAZAKHSTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
KYRGYZSTAN
00-800-500-55-500
FINLAND
030-6227 515
www.samsung.com
FRANCE
01 48 63 00 00
www.samsung.com
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 1
www.samsung.com
Country/Regio
n
PHILIPPINES
Customer Care Center
Web Site
1800-10-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-3-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-8-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
02-5805777
www.samsung.com
POLAND
0 801 1SAMSUNG
(172678)
022-607-93-33
www.samsung.com
PORTUGAL
80820-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
PUERTO RICO
1-800-682-3180
www.samsung.com
QATAR
800-2255
REP. DOMINICA
1-800-751-2676
www.samsung.com
RUSSIA
8-800-555-55-55
www.samsung.ru
SINGAPORE
1800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
SLOVAKIA
0800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
SOUTH AFRICA
0860 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
SPAIN
902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172
678)
www.samsung.com
SWEDEN
0771 726 7864
(SAMSUNG)
www.samsung.com
SWITZERLAND
0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min)
www.samsung.com
SYRIA
1825-22-73
TADJIKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
TAIWAN
0800-329-999
www.samsung.com
THAILAND
1800-29-3232
02-689-3232
www.samsung.com
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO
1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
TURKEY
444 77 11
www.samsung.com
U.A.E
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
www.samsung.com
U.K
0845 SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
U.S.A
1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
www.samsung.com
UKRAINE
8-800-502-000
www.samsung.ua
www.samsung.com/ua_ru
Country/Regio
n
Customer Care Center
Web Site
UZBEKISTAN
8-10-800-500-55-500
www.samsung.com/kz_ru
VENEZUELA
0-800-100-5303
www.samsung.com
VIETNAM
1 800 588 889
www.samsung.com
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 2
glossary
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well
as mentioned in this user’s guide.
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
802.11
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to
prevent any damage when you move the machine.
802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN)
communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards
Committee (IEEE 802).
Collation
802.11b/g/n
802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band.
802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports
bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer
interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth
devices.
Access point
Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that
connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local
area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of
WLAN radio signals.
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can
scan some amount of the paper at once.
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing
additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of
the machine.
Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
CSV
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
DADF
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and
white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file
format on that platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each
Glossary_ 1
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that
will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that
the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box
state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,
received fax data.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Ethernet
DLNA
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows
devices on a home network to share information with each other across
the network.
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,
such as the Internet.
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in
use during the 1990s to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol
(such as the Internet or an intranet).
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that
the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer
equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one
print cycle.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer
limits 2,400 pages a day.
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It
consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm
when it comes out of a laser printer.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a
network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented
by various shades of gray.
Halftone
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes
caused by telephone line noise.
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as
another.
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Glossary_ 2
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement
of technology related to electricity.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to
the peripheral (for example, a printer).
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of
an organization's information or operations with its employees.
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal
website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing
the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer
can complete within one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution
than older ones.
IPX/SPX
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be
used on other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over
TCP/IP.
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates
the status of a machine.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g.,
00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network
Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers
trying to locate machines on large networks.
MFP
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a
codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently
compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.
MMR
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection
Glossary_ 3
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method
recommended by ITU-T T.6.
Modem
PostScript
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted
information.
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
MR
Printer Driver
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer
to the printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can
be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can
produce in one minute.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is
usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape.
An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its
usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets
worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning
mechanism, and paper.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies
many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser
printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a
device independent and resolution independent format.
Glossary_ 4
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
RADIUS
Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for
remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables
centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and
passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting)
concept to manage network access.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated
Inter-process communication mechanism.
SMTP
URL
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple,
text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.
USB
SSID
Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network
(WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to
communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a
maximum length of 32 characters.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
Subnet Mask
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,
currency, and other government documents to discourage
counterfeiting.
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to
determine which part of the address is the network address and which
part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after
failed transmissions.
WEP
Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE
802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP
provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as
it is transmitted from one end point to another.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant
scanner.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been
made by various image processing applications.
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless
(Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the
security features of WEP.
Toner Cartridge
WPA-PSK
A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which
contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and
photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper.
Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser,
causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small
business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the
wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop
devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a
wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security.
TWAIN
WPS
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a
TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can
be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for
Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a
wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you
can configure the wireless network connection easily without a
computer.
UNC Path
XPS
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description
Language (PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for
portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It
is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a
vector-based device-independent document format.
Glossary_ 5
index
A
default settings
changing the default mode 2
setting a fax header 2
tray setting 6
address book 6
answering machine/fax 4
direct USB 3, 6, 7
authentication
printing a report 3
display 3, 6
document feeder 1
B
duplex printing (manual)
back 3, 6
printer driver 3
booklet printing 3
booklets 3
E
buttons
eco copy 3
eco copy 8
menu 3, 6, 8
power 8
print screen 8
start (black) 3, 6
start (color) 3, 6
stop/clear 3, 6
WPS (CLX-3185FW only) 3, 7
Entering
using the number keypad 2
eoc copy 6
error message 5
extension telephone 4
F
C
favorites settings, for printing 2
changing clock mode 1
fax 6
cleaning
fax receiving
inside 1
outside 1
scan unit 3
activating secure receive 5
changing the receive mode 4
DRPD mode 4
extension telephone 4
in answering machine/fax 4, 5
secure receiving 5
cleaning a machine 1
control panel (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N) 3
control panel (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW) 6
fax sending
convention 1
delay sending 3
multi sending 3
redialing the last number 2
resending automatically 2
sending a fax 2, 3
copy 6
copy setup 2
copying
fax setup 1
basic copying 1
changing the copy setup 2
clone copy 3
collation 3
n-up copy 2
poster copy 3
reducing or enlarging copies 1
faxing
address book 6
adjusting darkness 6
adjusting resolution 5
changing receiving mode 4
changing the fax setup 1
delaying a fax transmission 3
forwarding faxes 6
group dial 7
preparing to fax 1
receiving 4
D
date and time setting 1
_1
loading
receiving a fax in memory 5
receiving in Ans/Fax mode 4
receiving in Tel mode 4
receiving with an extension telephone 4
redialing the last number 2
sending 2
sending a priority fax 3
setting the fax header 2
speed dial 6
in the document feeder 1
originals on the scanner glass 1
special media 4
M
Macintosh
common Macintosh problems 17
driver installation for network connected 5
driver installation for USB cable connected 4
printing 6
scanning 7
sharing a machine locally 6
supplied software 2
system requirements 2
using SetIP 3, 9
features 1
machine features 1
power saving feature 3
print media feature 3
printer driver 1
supplied software 1
front view (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N) 1
front view (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW) 4
maintenance parts 1
manual tray
G
using special media 4
glossary 1
memory
clearing memory 3
I
menu overview 4
id copy 3, 6, 2
N
introducing buttons 8
network
driver installation
Linux 5
Macintosh 5
Windows 3
installing environment 1
introducing network programs 1
IPv6 configuration 6
SetIP program 2, 3, 8, 9
using a wired network 1
using a wireless network 1
J
jam
clearing paper 2
tips for avoiding paper jams 1
job timeout setting 4
L
language 1
network setup 4
LCD display
number keypad 6
changing the display language 1
N-up copy 2
LED
N-up printing
machine status 8
understanding the status LED 8
Macintosh 7
Windows 3
left/right arrow 3, 6
Linux
O
common Linux problems 16
driver installation for network connected 5
driver installation for USB cable connected 4
printer properties 8
printing 7
scanning 7
supplied software 2
system requirements 3
unified driver configurator 3
using SetIP 3
on hook dial 6
original document
clearing jam 2
loading
in the document feeder 1
on the scanner glass 1
output support 6
overlay printing
_2
printing a document
create 5
delete 5
print 5
Linux 7
Macintosh 6
problems
P
copying problems 14
paper feeding problems 9
power problems 8
printing quality problems 11
placing a machine
adjusting the altitude 1
spacing 1
poster 3
R
power button 3, 6
rear view (CLX-3185/CLX-3185N) 2
power off
rear view (CLX-3185FN/CLX-3185FW) 5
button 8
redial/pause 6
power saver
regulatiory information 1
using power save mode 3
print media
resolution
card stock 6
envelope 5
glossy paper 6
guidelines 2
labels 5
letterhead paper 6
output support 3
preprinted paper 6
setting the paper size 6
setting the paper type 6
transparency 5
faxing 5
S
safety
information 1
symbols 1
scan to button 3
scan/email 7
print resolution set
scanner
Linux 8
glass 1
loading documents 1
print resolution, set
scanner glass
Macintosh 7
loading documents 1
print screen button 3
scanning
printer driver
basic information 1
for local connection 1
Linux 7
Macintosh 7
TWAIN 6
USB flash memory 1
WIA 6
features 1
printer preferences
Linux 8
printing
changing the default print settings 6
changing the print percentage 4
fitting your document to a selected paper size 4
Linux 7
Macintosh 6
multiple pages on one sheet of paper
Macintosh 7
Windows 3
poster 3
printing a document
Windows 1
printing on both sides of paper
Windows 3
printing to a file 6
USB memory 2
using overlay 5
using watermarks 4
serial number 1
service contact numbers 1
SetIP program 2, 3, 8, 9
setting
default paper 3
Smart Panel
general information 2
specifications
general 1
print media 3
start button (black) 3, 6
_3
start button (color) 3, 6
supplied software 2
system requirements 2
using SetIP 2, 8
status LED 3, 6
stop/clear button 3, 6
Windows 7
scan 7
supplies
available supplies 1
estimated toner cartridge life 4
ordering 1
SyncThru Web Service
general information 1
T
toner cartridge
estimated life 4
handling instructions 4
non-Samsung and refilled 4
redistributing toner 1
storing 4
toner color 3, 7
tray
adjusting the width and length 2
changing the tray size 2
setting the paper size and type 6
TWAIN, scan 6
U
USB cable
driver installation 3
USB flash memory
data backup 2
managing 3
printing 2
scanning 1
using help 3
W
watermark
create 4
delete 5
edit 4
print 4
WIA
scan 6
Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS) 9
Windows
common Windows problems 15
driver installation for network connected 3
driver installation for USB cable connected 3
printing 1
scanning 1
sharing a machine locally 5
_4